JP6507630B2 - Pachinko gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  It is about a pachinko game machine.

  As a pachinko gaming machine in recent years, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made with the game ball entering the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit (special game The pachinko game machine which can shift to the state and open the large winning opening provided on the game board surface and obtain a large number of prize balls is the mainstream. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, a time-saving gaming state that raises the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery and the probability variation gaming state that raises the winning probability in the big hit lottery There are also gaming machines that have the above-mentioned gaming states and create a gaming progress state advantageous to the player by these gaming states, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Patent No. 5536601 Patent No. 5572745

  However, since there are many such gaming machines in the past, there is a problem that development of a model that can realize further innovative game characteristics is desired.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize winning entry ball detecting device C22s) in which the game ball entering the variable winning prize port (for example, the second big winning prize port C20) may enter;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs First random number temporary storage means,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquiring unit, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied , the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game is executed which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, the V prize entrance entering detection device C22s). Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50),
A game information transmission unit (for example, game information transmission control) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) Means MT),
One unit from the variable display start of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the first special game and the second special game are not executed in the specific gaming state, and the one unit is determined. When played many times, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state,
If the special game state is entered after the end of execution of the first special game and / or the second special game, the number of times set as the predetermined number of times can be made variable.
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
If execution of the variable winning opening opening game is scheduled while the specific gaming state is maintained, it is scheduled after the execution of the second special game based on the scheduled variable winning opening opening game is scheduled Configured to be able to notify the number of times in advance ;
Under the condition that the variable winning opening opening game is scheduled to be executed when the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is possible to notify in advance that the variable winning opening opening game is scheduled to be executed by the second hold before the second hold .

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in a gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an operation diagram according to the second big winning opening of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an operation diagram according to the electric combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an entire electrical block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a process of determining a fixed change time on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of distribution / control object control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the V prize winning entry determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the on-hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an operation view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of remaining time short display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from this embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flow chart of the process of controlling the display of the right-handed during the short on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of special game in-progress effect control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is an image diagram concerning special game in effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a main gaming symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game effect control processing in the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a table configuration diagram used in first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of falling lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram of the auxiliary game side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub main control unit in the sixth embodiment pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of hold information management / hold display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game secondary game display content determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the construction of a subsidiary gaming table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game secondary game content determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game secondary game display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of hold information prior determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of secondary game display area size change control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entry" includes not only winnings where the winning balls are paid out, but also passing to "through chuckers" where there is no winning balls paid out. The "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to narrow random numbers (for example, hard as random numbers Random number, soft random number as pseudo random number). For example, the so-called "basic random number" affecting the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, the variation pattern (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined "Variation mode decision random number" for doing, "symbol decision random number" which decides stop pattern, and "per hit symbol decision random number" which decides whether or not to shift to specific game (for example probability fluctuation game) after special game be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode or the content of the fixed identification information, it is not necessary to use all these random numbers, and at least one random number which is the same as or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once in the entrance (for example, starting entrance) which is a trigger for acquiring random numbers. The random number acquired by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as a winning random number + a variation mode determination random number + a symbol determination random number ... is referred to as a single random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also be another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The “gaming state” is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state from a non-probability fluctuation gaming state where the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Transition game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning to start slot that becomes transition lottery to special game (so-called, normal symbol time reduction state, for example, variable members are attached to the start slot In the case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, the notification time of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short, and so on.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 first type compound machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (eg, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as conventional type 1, type 2, type 3 and general electronic combination). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of the flag, and the means name etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the embodiments and modifications described above should not be construed as limiting as applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table regarding various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

  Here, prior to the detailed description of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a brief configuration according to the present invention will be described.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability relating to the second main game is a high probability, and during the small hitting game, the game ball can be almost certainly entered into the V winning opening, A configuration will be described in detail (this embodiment) in which the gaming state after the end of the special game according to the small hit is determined based on the gaming state when the small hit is selected according to the second main game.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, the configuration of (this embodiment) may be different depending on the big hit symbol when the number of time reductions granted after the end of the special game, and whether the big hit symbol is the first main game symbol A configuration in which the expected value of the time reduction number to be granted is changed depending on whether or not it is the 2 main game pattern will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the present embodiment).

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the player wins a small hit in the time-saving gaming state from the configuration of (this embodiment), the player temporarily launches the gaming ball to the big winning opening (right Will be described in detail in (Modification 2 of this embodiment) in which the game ball is changed to be able to be notified when the game ball is allowed to enter the V winning opening. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game pertaining to any second main game hold, the second main game hold occurs again up to the upper limit number and the game The configuration for performing seamless rendering in a period during which the player keeps giving out the balls will be described in detail in the second embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot (the jackpot symbol has stopped or the game ball enters the V winning opening) enters the game ball into a certain ball entry port thereafter The configuration in which the special game starts is described in detail in (Modification 1 from the second embodiment).

  Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, the limitation frequency table can be referred to after the end of the special game, and the limitation frequency table to be referred to is determined based on the big hit symbol or small hit symbol stopped immediately before the execution of the special game A configuration that is configured to be obtained and that the number that can cause the second main game hold is different according to the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol will be described in detail in the third embodiment.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, a configuration similar to that of (the third embodiment) is realized by making the table for variation mode determination to be referred to by the number of reservations different without using the limitation frequency ( A first modification of the third embodiment will be described in detail.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, a configuration in which one second type non-electric combination is provided will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, a configuration having two second-class non-motorized prizes will be described in detail in (Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, a configuration in which the V winning opening is not provided and a probability fluctuation gaming state exists will be described in detail in the fifth embodiment.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, there are two auxiliary game start ports, and in the non-time shortening game state, the second main game start port electric combination can be opened long (Sixth Embodiment This will be described in detail.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present embodiment, a configuration that can execute parallel lottery will be described in detail in the seventh embodiment.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine slots and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame aligned with the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be able to open and close via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or recovering the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the launch rail, and removing the game balls from the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects are output according to the gaming state and the like.

  Next, in the game board, a game area D30 partitioned by the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34 is formed. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills not shown and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, 1st large winning opening C10, 2nd large winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 is provided with a first main game start port entering ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start slot entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry Generate ball entry information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric role object B11d. Here, the second main game start slot entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the second main game start slot B10, and indicates the second main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game start opening electric winning combination B11d changes into a closed state in which the game ball is hard to win in the second main game start opening B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state (but The second main game start opening electric part B11d in this embodiment is a mode different from the well-known tulip type, so the details will be described later).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are disposed separately, and the game ball which flows down the left side (based on the middle of the game area) of the game area D30 However, while being easy to be induced to the first main game start slot A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start slot B10, and the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the middle of the game area) of the game area D30 is the first main game While being difficult to be guided to the starting opening A10, it is configured to be easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. In addition, "it is easy to be induced" and "it is hard to be induced" are determined by the size of the number of balls when 10000 balls are respectively emitted to the right and left sides of the game ball, for example.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start slot entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start slot H10, and generates the auxiliary game start slot entrance information indicating the ball entry when entering the ball. Do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric winning combination B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball that flows down the right side (the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily induced in the auxiliary game start port H10, and the game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 is Although it is configured to be hard to be induced {but not limited to this, the configuration is such that gaming balls flowing down the left side (based on the middle of the gaming region) of the gaming region D30 are easily guided to the auxiliary gaming start port H10 (For example, the auxiliary game start port H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 is disposed above the out opening D36, and the second large winning opening C20 is disposed at the upper right of the out opening D36. The game ball flowing down the standard is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out port D36.

  Next, the first big winning opening C10 is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) is stopped at the big hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located above the out-port D36 and in the lower part of the second large winning opening C20, which is in a state of horizontal rectangle. Specifically, the first large winning opening C10 is a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (and the first large winning). And a mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entering ball information indicating the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The first big winning opening electric winning combination C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 to the first big winning opening C10 in the normal state where the gaming ball can not win or difficult to win and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win (first (1) The large winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the first big winning opening electric combination C11d is a flat plate-like member and substantially affects the flow direction of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area D30 so as to close the first large winning opening C10. In the normal state, the game player closes the first big winning opening C10 and changes the flow direction of the gaming ball flowing down the game area D30 toward the opening. The inclined state is an open state (that is, a so-called general attacker mode).

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) is stopped at the small hitting symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located at the upper right of the out opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric combination C21d (and the second large winning To the mouth solenoid C24), the V prize opening C22 and the V prize opening C22, which will be an execution trigger of a special game (in the present embodiment, a game in which the first big winning opening C10 is opened) in the inside thereof. V winning opening entering ball detection device C22s, which is a sensor for detecting entry of the game ball, and game ball entering the second large winning opening C20 directly out of the second large winning opening C20 or V winning opening The distribution combination object C23 for distributing whether to guide | induce to C22 once is provided. Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 It is made variable (the second big winning opening solenoid C24 is excited and made variable). In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d is a flat member like the first large winning opening rolling combination C11d, but a variable aspect of the first big winning opening electric combination C11d. Unlike the above, the aspect of variable in the vertical direction with respect to the game board (game area D30) is adopted. That is, the second big winning opening motorized role C21d is almost completely buried in the game board (the game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as retracted state) and transparent from the game board (the game area D30) A state of projecting toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) is taken until the board D16 approaches. Then, the second winning opening electric character C21d is a box-like member C20-1 (a game in which the box-like member can enter the box-like member capable of receiving the game balls protruding from the game board (game area D30) and flowing down The ball plays a role of a lid of the second big winning opening C20), that is, when the second big winning opening electric combination C21d takes a retreating state, the box-like member C20-1 Is the case where the game ball can enter into the second large winning opening C20), while the second large winning opening electric combination C21d takes the advanced state, the box-like member C20-1 (and thus the second The game ball can not enter into the special winning opening C20) (this box-like member is substantially sealed). Then, whether the gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is discharged directly out of the second large winning opening C20 or is temporarily guided to the V winning opening C22 by the distribution part C23. It is configured to be distributed.

  Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning opening C22, and plays a role of effect (effect of notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C22) by lighting or the like.

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (the second main game) Is an apparatus that executes the displayed information. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and the first main game And a symbol hold display unit A21 h (a second main game symbol hold display unit B21 h). Here, the first main game symbol holding display area A21h (the second main game symbol holding display area B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game) Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol not being executed). In addition, 1st main game symbol display part A21g (2nd main game symbol display part B21g) is comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) is "0"-"9. "10" numbers displayed with "" and lost "-" {However, not limited to this, 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of reservations is not limited to four lamps, and the maximum number of reservations can be displayed (for example, one lamp can be displayed. Number 1: lighted, pending number 2: low-speed blinking, pending number 3: medium-speed blinking, pending number 4: high-speed blinking, if configured).

  In the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), because the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not have to have a dramatic role. The size of is set so as not to be noticeable. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) itself has an effective role and the first decorative symbol (the second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect to be described later The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes display or the like of an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the change display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information, and a moving image of a decorative symbol variation of a plurality of rows imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying the In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display, but may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, which are linked to the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding display unit H21 h is configured of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of holdings of the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays an effect by blinking or the like.

  The above is the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, but prior to the description of the characterizing portion of the present embodiment, the game contents developed on the gaming board will be outlined. First, the game ball fired toward the game area D30 flows down a flow-down route (hereinafter, may be referred to as a left-handed route) formed on the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30, The flow-down route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-handed route) formed on the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 may be divided into two or more. Here, while the game ball which has flowed down on the left-handed route has an opportunity to enter the first main game starting port A10 or the first large winning opening C10, the game ball which has flowed down the right-handed route is assisted The opportunity to enter the game start port H10, the second large winning opening C20, the second main game starting port B10, and the first large winning opening C10 can be obtained. Also, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to more easily enter the first big winning opening C10 than the gaming ball that has flowed down the left-handed route ( “Easy” and “hard to enter” are determined, for example, by the size of the number of balls when 10000 balls are emitted to the right and left hitting routes, respectively.

  In addition, on the left-handed route (although not shown), the game ball is induced or not induced toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and a windmill. Takes a variety of flow modes, while on the right-handed route (although not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is small compared to the left-handed route, and the game balls have a substantially uniform flow-down mode. take.

  More specifically, with regard to the right-handed route, first, a game ball (for example, the case where the launch strength of the game ball by the launcher is maximum and is also called right) is Drops by its own weight by flying in the game area D30 along the outer rail D32 and colliding with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30. Get started. Next, after the falling game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 directly below it with high probability, the flow passage width exceeds one game ball and is less than two game balls. The ball is collected to D50 (the ball is collected regardless of whether or not the player enters the auxiliary game start port H10). Next, the gaming ball which has flowed down along the straightening passage D50 is discharged from the outlet of the straightening passage D50, and then slightly inclined left with respect to the horizontal direction, and the first stage passage D51-which is in three stages After rolling on the first, second-stage passage D51-2, and the third-stage passage D51-3, the air is discharged toward the out port D36.

  Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second winning opening motor electric part C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed in advance by being fixed to the game board. That is, when the second large winning opening electric motor combination C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first large winning opening electric combination C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectification passage D50 The game ball released from the roll rolls on the first stage passage D51-1. The game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2. The game ball released from the two-step passage D51-2 rolls on the third step passage D51-3 → The game ball released from the third step passage D51-3 is released toward the out port D36 , And so as to adopt a substantially uniform flow-down mode.

  As described above, in order for the game ball which has flowed down the right-handed route to take a substantially uniform flow-down mode, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds) When the game start opening H10 is stably entered and the second big winning opening electric combination C21d is in the open state (retracted state), the box-like member C20-1 (in other words, the second large winning opening) It is possible to stably enter the first large winning opening C10 when the first large winning opening electric symbol C11d is in the open state by stably entering the inside of C20). It should be noted that the second main game start opening electric combination that can take the retracted state and the advanced state in the space until the gaming ball discharged from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3. The object B11d is provided, and when the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is in the advance state, the game ball can be guided toward the second main game start opening B10. However, this point will be described later.

  In this case, the gaming ball discharged from the outlet of the straightening passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second winning hole electric power winning object C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second big winning opening motor electric combination C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the exit of the straightening passage D50, it is essential to have a configuration for removing the momentum of the gaming ball that has flowed down (substantially dropped) in the straightening passage D50. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in the vicinity of the outlet of the straightening passage D50, the passage wall surface of the straightening passage D50 has a shape projecting toward the inside of the straightening passage D50. Is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball by dropping in a zigzag. In this embodiment, in the same reason, the structure for removing the momentum (rolling speed) of the gaming ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is also provided, but this point Will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 2, a configuration for scraping the momentum (rolling speed) of the gaming ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 will be described. First, as described above, the first stage passage D51-1 is slightly inclined to the left with respect to the horizontal direction, and is formed by the second winning prize port electric winning combination C21d in the advanced state, The special winning opening motorized role C21d itself is a flat member. Therefore, the momentum (rolling speed) of the gaming ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 tends to accelerate as it is, unless some measures are taken to reduce the momentum of the gaming ball, Even if the second large winning opening electric symbol C21d in the advanced state is displaced to the retracted state {especially, a series of displacement from the advanced state → retracted state → advanced state is instantaneously (for example, about 0.1 seconds) ) When it is performed, there is a possibility that the game ball can not be successfully guided to the box-like member C20-1 (in the second, the second big winning opening C20). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as in the flow path shape provided near the outlet of the straightening passage D50, a device for advancing the gaming ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 in a zigzag manner is applied. .

  More specifically, in the range where the game ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, a plurality of projections D51-1-1 are provided on the game board surface side, and a plurality of projections are also provided on the transparent plate D16 side. The projection D51-1-2 is provided, and the plurality of projections D51-1-1 and the plurality of projections D51-1-2 are alternately arranged. Here, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 may be configured to be directly fixed to the game board surface, but the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 may be directly attached to the back surface of the transparent plate D16. If fixed, temporarily, when the transparent plate D16 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the gaming machine, the plurality of projections D51-1-2 will be exposed to the outside, so maintenance There is a possibility that a person may come in contact with the plurality of projections D51-1-2 (worst, peeling off) (Also, it becomes difficult to use the transparent plate D16 as a member of another game machine) . Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the present embodiment, the wall surface on the transparent plate D16 side of the wall surface of the box-like member C20-1 is moved to the second winning prize port electric winning combination in an advanced state The plurality of projections D51-1-2 are fixed to the wall surface of the extended box-like member C20-1 while being extended upward from C21d.

  In this manner, by providing the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 within the range where the gaming ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, the first stage Since the gaming balls rolling on the passage D51-1 advance in a zigzag manner, the momentum (rolling speed) of the gaming balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 tends to be decelerated. Here, when the gaming ball is continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds), the momentum of the gaming ball released from the exit of the straightening passage D50 is removed. The momentum of the gaming ball reaching the first stage passage D51-1 and rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is further decelerated, so it is rolling on the first stage passage D51-1. As a result of the long period, even if the second big winning opening electric motor winning combination C21d (ie, the first stage passage D51-1) is instantaneously displaced to the retracted state, the box-like member C20-1 (extended Makes it possible to guide the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20). In addition, the fact that the momentum of the gaming balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is decelerated means that, in the case where the gaming balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route, the positional interval between those gaming balls Means a narrowing of the ball (congestion of gaming balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 occurs). Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are present on the second winning opening electric symbol C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1), in this case, the second winning Even if the mouth electric part C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1) is instantaneously displaced to the retracted state, the plurality of box members C20-1 (and thus the second large winning opening C20) It is also possible to guide individual game balls together (the lower part of the figure illustrates an image).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 3, an operation aspect of the second main game start opening electric combination B11 d will be described. First, as described above, the second main can take the retracted state and the advanced state in the space until the gaming ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3. A game start opening electric combination B11d is provided (the same applies to the second large winning opening electric combination C21d as to the retracted state and the advanced state, but as described below, the second main game start) In the case of the mouth electric role B11d, in the case of taking the advance state, the game ball is in an open state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second main game start port B10, and when it is in the retracted state The ball is in a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball). Here, in the present embodiment, the second main game start port electric role B11d in the retracted state (closed state) is momentarily displaced to the advanced state (opened state) for special game characteristics to be described later. Also as {especially when a series of displacement from retraction state → advance state → retraction state is performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 seconds)}, the second main game start opening B10 is entered It is configured to be able to physically secure what you do not do.

  More specifically, the gaming ball rolling on the second stage passage D51-2 slightly inclined leftward with respect to the horizontal direction once collides with the locking portion D51-2a, and the third stage passage D51 Start to fall to -3 by its own weight. Here, when the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is in the retracted state, it falls as it is and reaches the third stage passage D51-3 (the second stage in the figure). On the other hand, when the second main game start port electric role B11d is in the advanced state, the shape of the second main game start port electric role B11d itself can receive the dropped game ball and the second main game In addition to being extended to reach the starting opening B10, since it is installed so as to be slightly inclined to the right with respect to the horizontal direction, this dropped game ball is the second main game starting opening B10 It starts rolling toward the end (as shown in the third row of the figure, the traveling direction of the gaming ball is switched from left to right). And, when the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d maintains the advanced state until the game ball which has started rolling toward the second main game start opening B10 reaches the second main game start opening B10 , While entering the second main game start slot B10 as it is, while the game ball rolling toward the second main game start slot B10 reaches the second main game start slot B10 2 When the main game start opening electric role B11d is displaced to the retracted state, it will fall toward the third stage passage D51-3 without entering the second main game start opening B10 (FIG. The next game ball in the 4th stage corresponds.

  When configured in this way, the time required for the game ball, which has begun rolling toward the second main game start opening B10, to reach the second main game start opening B10 is approximately 0.2 to 0.3 seconds Even if the second main game start opening electric combination B11d in the retracted state is momentarily displaced to the advanced state by designing so as to become {Especially, the retracted state → the advanced state → the retracted state It is possible to physically secure that the second main game starting opening B10 does not enter the ball when the series of displacements of {circle over (1)} are performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 seconds).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko game machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular, controls the entire game operation such as lottery when entering the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10) (ie, the game Control board M that performs control directly related to the benefit of the person and effect control means (sub main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, prize ball tank KT, prize ball rail KR, and game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the winning on each winning hole D20 A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 or the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (storage ball) of the upper bowl D20 To area D30 Launch device D42 that launches each ball, launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of launcher D42, power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine, and power on / off pachinko game machine A power switch Ea or the like which is a switch is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the payout of gaming balls is performed based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M to control the award ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbol, sound from the speaker D24, A sub control board S (in this example, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are disposed on one board) which controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 and the execution of an error notification etc. And a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative symbol, sounds from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and an error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that executes display processing such as variation display / stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, suspension display, and advance notice display. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub main control unit SM, and the sub sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that pre-stores a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, A RAM for temporarily storing data (such as various data generated during a game and a computer program read from a ROM) handled by the computer is mounted. Here, although not particularly illustrated, in the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent writing of a program or the like modified due to a fraudulent action, it is configured not to provide an unused area. It is preferable (for example, filling unused areas with all 0's, filling used areas at a young address, etc.). Also, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referred to due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data used in gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable to configure so as not to provide Similarly, when using the area of the RAM, it is preferable that the area is used by filling the area at a young address and that an unused program area is not provided. The outline configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection between each substrate and device will be outlined below.

  First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the aforementioned first main game start opening ball insertion detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball insertion detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening ball insertion detection device H11s, the first 1 large winning opening winning detection device C11s, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s, a general winning detection device (not shown, but with a general ball entry, there is a winning ball, but not a lottery for entering a symbol) , Drive solenoids (not shown, first big winning opening solenoid C13, second big winning opening solenoid C24, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the winning ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control unit SM and sub sub control unit SS), and based on the game progress, the prize balls are paid out. The information (commands) relating to etc. is configured to be able to be transmitted to the winning ball payout control board KH, and the information (commands) relating to the presentation / playing state of the game etc to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like through an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected by wiring with the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game related information to an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as indicated by arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bi-directional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (the communication method may use either serial communication or parallel communication). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls and a device that can be operated by a player, and receives a request for lending of game balls and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R to be transmitted. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launcher is additionally provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launcher (launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device) Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is adopted separately as a form adjacent to the game machine, but may be integrated with the game machine, in which case, it is rented by the prize ball payout control board KH. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, the sub control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative symbol etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are provided in the sub control substrate S, and the control of sound to be output from the speaker D24 by the sub main control unit SM Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub control substrate S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate substrate Although it may be possible, a merit of being able to reduce the situation where noise mixes in space merit, wiring, etc. arises by being configured to be integrated. Further, the work assignment in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable in the case where a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Also, electronic value may be given without giving a physical award ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) involved in the effect, a prize ball payout control board KH performing payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, and information communicably connected ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps) and the speakers D24. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control substrate KH is electrically connected to a prize ball dispenser KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. And ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. The respective units included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (apparatus) will be described.

  First, the main control board M is a game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. Game progress means MP in charge of the current and past gaming state [eg, main gaming related state {normal gaming state, specific gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state), special gaming state}, status related to auxiliary gaming (Easy open state, non easy open state), stop symbol and fluctuation mode information related to the main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, gaming state during special game (for example, round number and winning number information) Game status temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing etc., various game information {eg stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {eg 15R big hit, 8R big hit, 4 on the gaming peripheral device side Information transmission control means MT (and unsent command is stored to transmit information relating to the big hit, loss}, fluctuation mode (eg, fluctuation time), special game start signal / state information / end signal, hold information etc.) Buffer for command transmission buffer MT10, and a prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling a prize ball payout control board KH to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning of the gaming ball to various winning openings There is.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines the ball entry determination means MJ 10 for determining the inflow of the game ball to each ball entry port (starting port etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be acquired. The random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 20 for acquiring the respective random numbers based on the above, and the holding control means MJ 30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting opening during the variable display as the holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progress means MP, directly to the open and close decision of the display control means MP10 for performing control to display the fluctuation and stop display of each symbol, and the second main game start opening electric role object B11d of the second main game start opening B10 The second main game start opening electric role opening and closing control means MP20-B for performing various processing related, special game control means MP30 to control the special game advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first main With regard to the game and the second main game and the auxiliary game, the second big winning without determination of which gaming state to shift the current gaming state, and transition of the gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state) It has small hitting game control means MP40 which manages execution of the small hitting game which can open mouth C20, and the specified game control means MP50 for performing processing which shifts a game state based on the decision. Each means will be described in detail below.

  First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first main game start slot A10. The first main game start slot entry ball determination means MJ11-A and the second main game start slot The second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B to determine whether the game ball has entered the ball B10, and the auxiliary game start slot to determine whether the game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start slot H10 In the first large winning opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10, and the second large winning opening C20, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first large winning opening C10. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second winning prize entry ball determining means MJ11-C20 and the V winning opening C22, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the ball, the V prize entry ball And determining means MJ11-V.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result To the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A which acquires a random number (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start opening B10 It is determined whether to acquire the second main game random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main according to the determination result The second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B to acquire the game pattern determination random number etc.), and whether to acquire the auxiliary gaming side selected random number, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result And RJ random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H There.

  Here, “the random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above includes, for example, “0” to “65535” or “assigned according to the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determination random number) It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number is not limited to a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo random number generated by hardware random number, software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method (plus one method) in which the values are sequentially expressed along the random number sequence, the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value There may be mentioned a method (initial value update method) in which)) is determined by a value having chance, a combination of these, and the like. By acquiring random numbers in this manner, it is possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are unlikely to be expected by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 controls the process related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been lowered. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number on the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission is obtained based on the judgment result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main gaming side random number acquired in a situation where the second main gaming symbol variation permission has not been lowered, and based on the determination result, the symbol variation permission is given to the random number. The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game obtained in the situation where the auxiliary game symbol variation permission has not come down Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for determining whether or not to temporarily store a random number, and holding the random number on the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H based on the determination result until the symbol variation permission is obtained. And.

  Here, the reserve / termination control means MJ 31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction judging means MJ 31 j which judges whether or not the condition for starting fluctuation is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four pieces, combining the random numbers with the holding order The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, for temporary storage in a fixed form. Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN, if it is a hit as a result of the success or failure lottery, to a special game if the result of the success or failure lottery, and the chance lottery means MN10 to lottery the availability of the special game and the opening or closing of the second main game start mouth electric role B11d Special game transition determination means MN20 which determines the transition of the game (for example, internally turns on the hit flag), the change fixation control means MN30 for determining and managing the change fixed time according to the main game symbol, and each random number Based on the symbol content determination means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol, the variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol based on each random number, It has distribution combination thing control means MN60 which controls the drive of object C23, V winning a prize opening control means MN70 which controls processing concerning the ball entry of the game ball to V winning a prize opening C22. Here, the lottery means MN10 is a first main game winning lottery with respect to the first main game symbol MN11-A, and a second main game winning lottery means performing a second lottery regarding the second main game symbol It has an MN11-B, and an auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game success or failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success or failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success or failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success or failure lottery regarding the first main game symbol. First main gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, second main gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a 2nd main gaming symbol winning lottery, and a winning / drawing lottery on an auxiliary gaming symbol , And each has a subsidiary gaming lottery table MN11ta-H to be referred to when performing the game. Further, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 has a fluctuation fixing time timer MN30t that measures the fluctuation fixing time.

  Here, when executing the winning or losing lottery based on the main gaming random number, the winning or not lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main gaming random number value is the same value as any of the per random number values, or If part or all of the random number is a continuous number, the main game random number is judged to be equal to or lower than the upper limit of the random number and to be equal to or higher than the lower limit, thereby executing the propriety determination. . By executing such a propriety determination, accurate determination processing can be performed. On the other hand, when performing a yes / no determination by comparison with only the upper limit of the random number range or with only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, 0 or 0 when the range of random numbers is 0 to 1023 Since it is necessary to set 1023) as the random number value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of sending current to the main control board M and all the bits in the storage area become 0 or 1 easily) There is a risk of Also, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery {If a plurality of random numbers are used in one lottery (so-called two-step lottery is performed), two random numbers are used Because it is necessary to prevent it from being synchronized}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 obtains the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A which determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B which determines the stop pattern of the second main game symbol based on the determined game content determination random number (the second main game random number) and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining the stop symbol pertaining to the first main game symbol, The said 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables which differ according to a success / failure result and a game state (For example, regarding a game state, it is for normal game → 1st main game normal game state Lottery table, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for first main game probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening game → lottery table for first main game time shortening gaming state). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B to be referred to when determining the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the result of the success or the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery Table, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for second main game probability fluctuation game state, time shortening game → lottery table for second main game time shortening game state). An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H has a lottery table MN41ta-H for determining an auxiliary gaming symbol to be referred to when deciding the stop symbol pertaining to the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the lottery for determining the auxiliary gaming symbol The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables which differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary gaming regular lottery table, probability fluctuation gaming and time shortening gaming → auxiliary gaming time shortening lottery table).

  Next, the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (such as variation time) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (the first main game random number). A second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B that determines a variation mode (a variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the MN51-A and the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number); It has an auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game pattern winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A which is referred to when determining the variation mode according to the first main game symbol Yes, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the success or failure result · gaming state (for example, for the gaming state, normal game → first main game normal Game state lottery table, time reduction game → 1st main game time reduction lottery state lottery table). Also, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B to be referred to when determining the variation mode according to the second main game symbol , The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B is provided with various lottery tables different according to the success or failure result · gaming state (for example, for the game state, normal game → second main game normal game State lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction lottery state lottery table). An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining an auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode The lottery table for determination MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables which differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary gaming normal lottery table, time shortening game → auxiliary gaming time shortening lottery table).

  In addition, distribution combination object control means MN60, the distribution combination object related information temporary storage means MN60b for temporarily storing information and the like related to the operation timing of the distribution item and the vibration time for measuring the operation time of the distribution item C23 It has a work item operation timer MN60t.

  Next, the display control means MP10 is for a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display area A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display area B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that performs stop display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, for a predetermined time assistance It has the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H which performs control which carries out stop display after changing a game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C have a first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) which can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, in order to determine whether the second main game start opening electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the second main game start opening electric combination B11d The second main game start opening electric combination opening and closing condition determination means MP21-B, the second main game start opening electric combination opening timer MP22t to measure the drive (open) time of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d And 有 し B.

  Next, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and if the special game transition conditions are satisfied, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32 to determine the special winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) to open the mouth C10 or the second large winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processing related to the special game (for example, the first large winning opening And a special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second large winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 and the first and second big winning opening electric role opening and closing control means MP33-C to open and close the first large winning opening electric role C11d and the second large winning opening electric position C21d There is a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta to be referred to when specifying the contents of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table The details of (not shown).

  Next, small hitting game control means MP40, small hitting game timer MP41t which measures the opening time of the 1st big winning a prize mouth C10 in small hitting game, discharge waiting time timer in order to manage discharge waiting time in small hitting game It has MP41t-2 and small hitting game related information temporary storage expedient MP40b which remembers the information which relates to the small hitting game temporarily.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the termination condition of the probability variation gaming state is satisfied, and whether the termination condition of the time shortening gaming state is satisfied or not. When it is determined that the short game termination condition determination means MP52 is included. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction. Here, the “specific game” is, for example, a probability variation game in which the lottery probability for the special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is relatively shortened compared to the non-time shortening gaming in progress (time shortening function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main gaming symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability fluctuation gaming without time limit restriction) except for). That is, the time reduction number is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. In addition, the above-mentioned probability variation game end condition judging means MP51 and time saving game end condition judging means MP52, for example, the transition lottery from specified game (for example probability fluctuation game and time shortening game) to normal game at predetermined probability every time of symbol fluctuation May have a function to perform (in the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a fall lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes a first main game (a game from a change of a first main game symbol to a stop) and a second main game (a change of a second main game symbol to a stop) First and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current gaming state in the game), and auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current gaming state in the auxiliary game H and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB 20 b and the current game state (for example, the number of remaining time short, the various flags related to the specific game, etc.) in the specific game Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the first or second main gaming symbol (the first or second main gaming symbol for which the variation start condition is established) in the current fluctuation. It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbol and variation mode information.

  In addition, the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H is the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the auxiliary gaming symbol currently being changed (the auxiliary gaming symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

  Next, gaming peripherals will be described. Note that some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, so the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the gaming peripherals are a first main gaming peripheral A which is a peripheral of the first main gaming side, a second main gaming peripheral B which is a peripheral of the second main gaming side, and a first main gaming side The first and second main game common peripheral device C, which is a common peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H regarding an auxiliary game, a sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, and a sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like are included. Here, the effects controlled by the sub main control unit SM include the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol, in the result of the game. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A is a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can perform stop display and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B is a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of the second main game start port B10, which is a trigger for transition to a special game, and the second main game symbol stop display and variable display. And.

  Next, the first and second main game common peripheral devices C are in the closed state at the time of the normal game, and in the special game (big hit), the first big winning opening C10 which is opened under the predetermined condition And the second large winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming peripheral device H is an auxiliary gaming start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and a stop indication and change indication of the auxiliary gaming symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that can be played.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub main control unit) SM is a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing of effect contents relating to effect display, and display control processing And an information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. The respective means will be described in detail below.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11 b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information concerning the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decoration symbol display control means SM21 which controls the variation pattern of the decoration symbol and the determination processing of the stop symbol and the display control processing, and a drawing hold which manages the number of holdings of the decoration symbol and the hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, background effect display control means SM23 which controls background image determination processing and display control processing, notice effect performance display control means SM24 which manages decision processing of display effect contents and display control processing, reach effect contents Display control processing of reach effect display control means SM25 which controls determination processing and display control processing, and right-handed instruction display (display for prompting the player to hit the right, and first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display) And a V prize detection effect display control means SM27 which governs display control processing of the V prize detection effect.

  Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 relates to the display display content determination means SM21n for determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol based on the information from the main control board M side and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. Mounting display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and a drawing variation time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decoration symbol ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM 21 n further includes a drawing (reference) table SM 21 ta for determination of the drawing variation content to be referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table) Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding the hold related to the decorative symbol.

  Next, on the basis of the information from the main control board M, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information relating to the background effect display, and the background effect display content determining means SM23n which determines the display content of the background effect. And background rendering related information temporary storage means SM23b.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines, based on the information from the main control board M, the display contents and display timing of the notice effect, etc. The temporary presentation related information temporary storage means SM 24 b for temporarily storing the information.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines reach display content determination means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and information related to the reach effect display And the reach production related information temporary storage means SM 25 b for temporarily storing

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is a sub information transmission / reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub main control unit SM, and an image display for displaying an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG And control means SS20. Here, the image display control unit SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage unit SS21b for temporarily storing information related to display of commands and various images received from the sub main control unit SM side.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG which displays an image concerning the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub sub control unit ) SS is connected to the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control Means (sub main control unit) means to be controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  From here, an example of the flow of a general process in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown as rectangles), judgments (shown as diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown as rounded rectangles) indicating start / end / return etc . Also, in the case where the details of the processing steps are illustrated in another flowchart, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (shown as a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, at the development stage of the gaming machine, it is also carried out to simultaneously develop gaming machines with different specifications, but in this example, the subroutine executed by the gaming machines with different specifications in the processing on the main side ( It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine not normally used, and prevents processing relating to an unused subroutine that is not normally executed due to noise or cheating.

  First, FIG. 7 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. That is, after power on of the gaming machine, after performing initialization (not shown), the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 1002, and resets the power supply unit E reset button (RAM clear It is determined whether or not the manager of the game arcade has intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the side of the main control board M (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at that timing) At this timing, a command may be set and may be configured to be transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, it is stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether the content of the RAM is not normal (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is correctly backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the above-described RAM clear process). On the other hand, if the result of step 1010 is NO, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the corresponding timing, or the command is set at the corresponding timing to be described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is allowed to be T) {as a result, when the execution fixed interrupt timing is reached, the diagram (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After the step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, an increment process of the random number counter) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  In addition, it is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured not to be a value at which the special game is executed. By doing this, in order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for determining the execution of the special game is executed).

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 1.5 ms), at step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes a motorized product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes special game control processing described later. Next, at step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1900, the main control board M executes a distribution combination object control process described later. Next, in step 1950, the main control board M executes a later-described V-type winning a prize ball determination process. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (in particular, the winning ball payout determining means MH) performs a winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball dispensing device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening on which the gaming ball has won. The payout control board KH is executed, and processing for managing the result etc. is executed (In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls based on one winning to the first main game start port A10 is “3 The number of winning balls based on one winning in the second main game starting slot B10 is “3”, the number of winning balls based on one winning in the first big winning slot C10 is “15”, the second The winning ball payout control process is configured to be executed with the number of winning balls based on one winning to the big winning opening C20 being "three". Next, at step 1998, the main control board M executes output processing of an external signal (output of information to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC or the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (sends the command set in each process described above to the sub main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing which had been done. In the control command transmission process, the order in which the sub main control unit SM receives the commands is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command) Since there is a case, the command is configured to be transmitted in the order in which the main control board M determines to transmit the command (in the order in which the command is set).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process of FIG. Be done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power-off time information (for example, checksum) based on the information of the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area and prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 7. First, at step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (flow in, in the case of a gate, passage). If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary gaming random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H, whether or not the holding ball is not the upper limit (for example four) Determine if In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ 32-H holds the holding ball in the form of setting the random number in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H together with the information indicating the number of the hold. Is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). Also in the case of No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. First, at step 1202, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and the electric combination open flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation flag is off. Do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H, and determines whether or not there is a holding ball regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and refers to the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side (flag state of auxiliary game time short flag). While acquiring, with reference to the lottery table MN41ta-H for auxiliary game symbol determination, the stop design is decided on the basis of the game state of the said auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number which is based on the retention sphere (for example, auxiliary game time short flag Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with high probability as compared to the case where it is turned off), and the temporary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H is temporarily stored. Next, at step 1218, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H is based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (the auxiliary gaming time short flag flag state), the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C The predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time {eg, 0.1 seconds when the auxiliary game time short flag is on (ie, a time shorter than the game ball firing interval of 0.6 seconds), the auxiliary game time short flag is off Set 10 seconds (that is, a time longer than 0.6 seconds between the game balls). Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball relating to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variation display of the auxiliary gaming symbol on the auxiliary gaming symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, at step 1224, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol has been reached. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H in step 1226 to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, at step 1228, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B is the second main game based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of auxiliary game time short flag) A predetermined time (for example, 2.0 seconds if the auxiliary game time short flag is on, 0 if the auxiliary game time short flag is off, for example, if the auxiliary game time short flag is on) Set 12 seconds). Next, at step 1234, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B turns on the electric combination open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B opens the second main game start opening electric combination B11d. Next, in step 1242, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start opening electric combination open timer MP22t-B to open the electric combination open time. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B closes the second main game start opening electric combination B11d in step 1244 and step 1246, and the auxiliary gaming state is temporary. In the flag area of the storage means MB10-H, the motorized part open flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1242, in step 1243, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B is the second main game start opening from the second main game start opening entrance ball detection device B11s Based on the ball information, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (one in this example) of balls have entered the second main game start port B10. In the case of Yes in step 1243, the process proceeds to step 1244, and in the case of No in step 1243, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300). If NO at step 1202, the process goes to step 1242, and if NO at step 1204, the process goes to step 1224. If NO at step 1206, step 1224 or step 1230, the next process (step 1300) Move to

  Here, the relationship between the type of the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol in the present embodiment and the open mode of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is shown outside the figure in the figure. In the present embodiment, there is a lost symbol "D0" and a hit symbol "D1" as the type of stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the auxiliary gaming time short flag is off (in the non-time shortening gaming state). In the case where the auxiliary game time short flag is on (during the time-saving gaming state) while the lost symbol "D0" is selected substantially deterministically, the hit symbol "D1" is selected substantially deterministically It is configured. Further, when the auxiliary game time short flag is off (in the non-time shortening gaming state) and the stop symbol is displayed for the symbol "D1", the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is "0.12 seconds The second main game start opening electric role thing is hit when the symbol 'D1' is stopped and displayed when the auxiliary game time short flag is on (time reduction gaming state) while being closed after being opened. B11d is closed after "open for 2.0 seconds". However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the flat main member provided so as to be buried in the game board surface is not the tulip type but the player of the aspect of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d Take a mode (so-called Vero-type electric chow) which can adopt an advanced state which is a state of being protruded to the side and a retracted state which is a state of being retracted to the player side. It takes about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds for the game ball dropped on the member to roll on the flat member and enter the second main game start slot B10. It is configured. That is, for example, the second main game start-up motorized part B11d is “opened for 0.12 seconds” (≒ the period in which the flat member is maintained in the advanced state is 0.12 seconds), for example, 2 Even if the main game start opening electric combination B11d is opened, it is configured not to enter the second main game start opening B10. In addition, it was scheduled that 2nd main game start mouth electric winning combination B11d does “open for 2.0 seconds” (期間 the period when the said flat component is maintained in advance state becomes 2.0 seconds) Also in this case, if there is a predetermined number (one in this example) of balls in the second main game start opening B10, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is closed, in other words Since the flat member is retracted before the period when the flat member is maintained in the advanced state expires, the subsequent game ball is placed on the flat member (the second main game. Even when rolling toward the starting opening B10, the subsequent game balls will fall without reaching the second main game starting opening B10. That is, even if the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is scheduled to perform "open for 2.0 seconds", a predetermined number (in this example, one for the second main game start opening B10) It is so constructed that it is easy to secure that only the entering of the ball will occur.

  Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1226 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to shift to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing the branch process using the stop display fixed flag and the timer). Is achievable).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1302, the first main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-A is the first main game start slot entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start slot entrance information Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game Side) determines whether or not the holding ball for the side is not the upper limit (four in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A acquires a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as a first main game content determination random number, a lottery random number for determining success or failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a symbol when hit, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of variation mode lottery random number to be acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained sequentially at this timing (note that, for example, only the pass / fail lottery random numbers are so-called hardware random numbers, Others may be so-called software random numbers). Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ 32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ 30 executes the command (the number of held, the held random number value, or the result or main outcome of the judgment based on the held random number value) regarding the newly generated hold. Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the stop symbol of the game symbol and the variation mode etc. to the sub main control unit SM (send to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999) And go to step 1312. Also, in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304, the processing shifts to step 1312.

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B is operated from the second main game start slot entrance detector B11s of the second main game start slot B10. It is determined whether the information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1313, whether or not the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B is unsatisfied with a predetermined error condition regarding illegal entrance to the second main game start port B10. Determine Here, as described above, due to the configuration of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d, etc., in the present embodiment, in the non-time shortening gaming state (provisionally the second main game start opening electric combination B11 d Does not enter the second main game start opening B10, even in the time reduction gaming state (provisionally the second main game start opening electric role B11d will perform "2.0 seconds open" Even if it is the case, it is difficult for the second main game start opening B10 to generate balls exceeding a predetermined number (one in this example), so the predetermined error condition is this configuration Conditions are set to monitor whether or not entering the second main game starting slot B10 contrary to (design) has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 1313, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game Side) determines whether or not the holding ball for the side is not the upper limit (four in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B acquires a second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, similarly to the first main game content determination means, three random numbers of success lottery random number, symbol lottery random number, and variation aspect lottery random number are acquired. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the lottery random number for the first main game and the lottery random number for the second main game Acquisition range of) is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ 32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ 30 executes the command (the number of held, the held random number value, or the result or main outcome of the judgment based on the held random number value) regarding the newly generated hold. Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the stop symbol of the game symbol and the variation mode etc. to the sub main control unit SM (send to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999) And proceed to the next processing (processing of step 1400). Also in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400).

  In the case of No in step 1313, that is, the processing in the case of satisfying a predetermined error condition regarding illegal entrance to the second main game starting opening B10 is not particularly limited, for example, in the non-time shortening gaming state When there is a ball entry to the second main game start port B10, only error notification is executed to continue the game progress, while a predetermined number of second main game start ports B10 are set in the time reduction gaming state ( For example, when there is a ball entry exceeding 6), the error notification may be performed and the game progress may be stopped (the processing after the processing is interrupted) (the processing in step 1322). Is applicable). In addition, as the execution condition of the error notification, (1) When the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is opened once, the second main game from the operation time of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d When there is a ball entry exceeding a predetermined number (for example, six) in the starting opening B10, (2) the second main game starting at the time of closing of the second main game starting opening electric playing object B11d accumulated during the game When the number of balls entered into the mouth B10 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, three), (2) after the timing at which the error notification condition of (1) or (2) is satisfied, the second main game starting opening Each time one game ball enters B10, it may be as well.

  Incidentally, although storage of the first main game content determination random number and storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in steps 1308 and 1318, the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. In the case of storing a memory, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a value (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc. To prevent it). In addition, with regard to the lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the gaming state relating to the suspension recorded already) is obtained during the period from when the lottery random number is obtained to when the lottery for the Not only the change but also a change in the gaming state may occur due to the newly generated suspension, so the gaming state at the time of the execution of the lottery for the lottery random number may be unpredictable. It is comprised so that the said lottery random number may be memorize | stored until it performs.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, at step 1401, the reserve / termination control means MJ 31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B to check whether or not there is a second main game symbol hold. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later in step 1400 (2), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning sequence is the first main game symbol) The second main game symbol is configured to be prioritized and executed, but it is not limited to this. May be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserve / termination control unit MJ 31 determines whether or not a change start condition is established. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device) (for example, a special game execution flag described later is not on), and the main game symbol is not changing (for example, a change flag described later) Is not on), there is a hold of the main game symbol, and is not in the small hit game (for example, the small hit execution flag described later is not on), and not during the fluctuation fixed time (for example, described later It is a condition that the flag is not on while the fluctuation is fixed (others, as described above, the condition includes the case where the progress of the game is not interrupted).

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the holding and digesting control means MJ31 is used as the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) While reading out the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the present symbol variation temporarily stored, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A (second main game The symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding and digesting processing). Next, in step 1408, the lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming coin lottery table MN11ta-A (the second main gaming coin lottery MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, the first main game Based on the game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the winning lottery random number), the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 14 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game winning lottery table MN11ta-A (second main gaming winning lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of table for determination of success or failure on the first main game side and the second main game side, that is, it has a so-called probability fluctuation function. No (it is a feature of this embodiment that a plurality of jackpots can be made to continue in a short period of time without having a probability fluctuation function). Instead, a small hit (a so-called round can be performed only once) in addition to a big hit (a so-called round (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "R") can be executed a plurality of times) If the result of the yes / no determination is a small hit, as will be described later, a big hit is induced (even if the result of the yes / no determination is not a big hit). There is. In addition, since the configuration for inducing the big hit may be realized by at least one of the first main game side and the second main game side, the case where the result of the success / failure judgment is a small hit is the first main game It may be configured to occur on at least one of the side and the second main game side (However, as will be described later, in order to make a plurality of big hits continue in a short period of time, the second main game side It is preferable to be configured to win a small hit on the determination table). In the present embodiment, especially on the second main game side, the small hit is configured to be won with a high probability (about 1/6) (provisionally, there are four second main game side reservations) If the small hit is won by about 1/6, the expectation for the small hit to be won is about 50% by the time the four pieces of reservations are finished being digested). The configuration of the main game table 1 is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to provide a small hit on the first main game side, or it is not necessary to provide a lose on the second main game side.

  Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) is the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (the second main game symbol determination) For the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming symbol equality lottery result and the first main gaming content determination random number (the second main gaming content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number) with reference to the lottery table MN41ta-B) for Are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 14 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, one of the main game symbols from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "7A" and "7B") is a big hit symbol Are configured to be determined. Note that the number of special game rounds and the opening time of the special winning opening determined with reference to the main game symbol are “7A” for “4R” big hit and “7B” for “15R” big hit. In addition, it is an example to the last also about the kind of random number value and stop symbol, and it is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds of the special game pertaining to the first main game and the number of rounds of the special game pertaining to the second main game are made different, and the number of game balls obtainable during the special game is made different. Although it is not limited to this, the number of rounds of special games pertaining to the first main game and the number of rounds of special games pertaining to the second main game are both “15R”, and the opening mode of the big winning opening is different By doing this, the number of game balls that can be acquired during the special game may be configured to be different.

  Next, in step 1416, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) is a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta corresponding to each gaming state. -A (2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) with reference to the main game symbol equality lottery result and the 1st main game content decision random number (2nd main game content decision random number) The variation mode of the main gaming symbols is determined based on the random number), and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 14 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation) of the main gaming symbol with respect to a random number value (particularly, fluctuation mode lottery random number) based on the main lottery symbol short result status of main gaming symbol It is configured that time) can be determined. For example, in the case where the random game result of the main game symbol is hit (big hit, small hit) for a random number value, it is easy to determine the change mode in which the change time is relatively long In the case (time saving gaming state), the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short is easily determined (in addition, matters that become characteristic with respect to fluctuation time will be described later). Note that this example is just an example and is not limited at all to the type of the variation mode (variation time) or the selectivity. In addition, the symbol variation time of the first main game may be relatively long in the time shortening gaming state (when the main game short flag is on) {symbol variation on the second main game When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by lowering the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (as it is advantageous for the player) In order to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main game side can not be separated.

  In addition, as shown in this figure, in this example, the fluctuation time according to the second main gaming symbol in the non-time shortening gaming state is 15 seconds when lost, 1 when it hits (big hit, small hit) is 60 seconds. Only the variation time of the type is configured to be selected, and in the non-time shortening gaming state, the same effect (representation relating to the variation of the decorative symbol, but the details will be described later) according to the variation time is It is comprised so that it may be performed (in the case of a hit, the production | presentation which alert | reports a hit will be performed after execution of the production at the time of a loss). In addition, the configuration of the main gaming table 3 is not limited to this, and the shortest variation time of the first main gaming side in consideration of all the gaming states, the success or failure results, and the number of holdings is all the gaming states and the success or failure results. It may be configured to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of the second main game side in consideration of the number of reservations, for example, as a case of the shortest fluctuation time, the non-time shortening gaming state and the first In the case where the main game reserve number is the maximum number and loses (or the time reduction gaming state and loses), the first main game side's shortest fluctuation time is "one second", the time reduction gaming state and the first The shortest change time on the second main game side may be set to “3 seconds” when the number of main game reservations is the maximum number and loss. In addition, only the variation on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state, the type and selection rate of the selection candidate for the variation time depend on the number of main game reservations {others (for example, the first main game in the time reduction gaming state In the case of the fluctuation of the side, the fluctuation of the second main gaming side in the non-time shortening gaming state, the fluctuation of the second main gaming side in the time shortening gaming state), it does not depend on the number of main game holdings}.

  Next, in step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes a variation fixed time determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1418, the game content determination means MN temporarily changes the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM the information related to the determined main gaming symbol such as fluctuation mode information etc. and the command relating to the current gaming state etc. The processing is sent to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the predetermined time relating to the change time of the main game symbol to the first and second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-C. Do. Next, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display area A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). In accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C on the second main game symbol display portion B21g), the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1428.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and changes. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 1426, control is passed to step 1428. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1426, at step 1440, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. It is determined whether the variation fixed flag (flag that is turned on in step 1438 described later) is on. In the case of Yes in step 1440, the process proceeds to step 1441, and in the case of No in step 1440, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C send information (design confirmation display instruction command) indicating that symbol variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM side The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display area A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C is displayed as the fixed stop symbol Control. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1436, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the fluctuation fixed time related to the fluctuation determined in step 1450 to the fluctuation fixed time timer MN30t, and start the timer. Do. Next, in step 1438, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the variable fixed flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. , And move on to step 1441.

  Next, in step 1441, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the variable fixed time timer MN30t and determine whether the timer value is zero or not. In the case of Yes in step 1441, in step 1442, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, during the variable fixing The flag is turned off, and the process goes to step 1444. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1441, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600).

  Next, in step 1444, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1444, in step 1445, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a command for executing the jackpot detection stop effect {described later, V prize detection effect, and this embodiment; In the game, the player performs the same effect as the game ball on the V winning hole C22 at the time of winning, thereby striking the right (to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30) Set a buffer for command transmission MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side, which is intended to make the player feel smooth that the progress of the game at the time of execution is hit). It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1446, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C in step 1447, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1447, in step 1448, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to step 1500. Also in the case of No at step 1447, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600). Also in the case of No at step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the variable fixed control means MN30 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether the main game time short flag is on or not (in other words, in the time-saving game state) It is determined whether or not the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is easy to open, and it is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the change fixed control means MN 30 refers to the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB 10 -C, and is the change related to the second main game symbol It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the change fixed control means MN30 refers to the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C, and whether the change is a change relating to a small hit or not judge. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to a long time (in this example, 30 seconds), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1418). Do. As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the change related to the time saving gaming state and the small hit of the second main game side, the time for causing the second main game side to hold is secured (details will be described later) However, in the present embodiment, a large number of game balls are acquired depending on whether or not the second main game side suspension caused in the time saving gaming state is absorbed in the non-time shortening gaming state and the small hit is won or not. It is important to make sure that the second main game is held to the hold upper limit number in the time-saving game state because it is a game characteristic that determines whether or not it can be made). It is configured to take a long time. In addition, the configuration for causing the above-mentioned second main game side hold to the hold upper limit number is not limited to this, during a small hit game winning in the time reduction gaming state (small hit game start demonstration time, small hit It may be configured to occur in the opening period of the second big winning opening C20 related to the game, or may be configured to occur during the variation related to the small hit won in the time-saving gaming state.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1452, step 1454 or step 1456, in step 1462, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to a short time (0.2 seconds in this example), and Processing (processing of step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c, and determines whether the counter value is larger than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the count value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c to determine whether the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508 and step 1510, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Processing (processing of step 1600). Also in the case of No in step 1502 or step 1506, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1602, the condition determination unit MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b, and the condition device operation flag (as described above, the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a big hit It is a flag that turns on when it is stopped and displayed with a symbol, but as will be described later, a flag that turns on also when there is a ball entry to the V winning opening C22 when a small hit game is executed) It is determined whether the is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 turns off the specific game flag (main game time short flag / auxiliary game time short flag) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Do. Next, in step 1610, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1700). Also in the case of No in step 1602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704 and step 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and turns off the special game execution flag Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game execution means MP33 sets a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game to the sub main control unit ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game is not received, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 opens the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in an open pattern (for example, “29.0 seconds Set the open pattern (open → closed). Next, in step 1716, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first large winning opening electric combination C11d of the first large winning opening C10 to open the first large winning opening C10, and the special game timer MP34t ( In particular, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) is set to the open time timer) and the process is started. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processing of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits the game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM side. The command transmission buffer MT10 for the command is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls have been received in the first big winning opening C10 in the round. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer) in step 1726 for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) related to opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process proceeds to step 1728. In the case of No at step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1728, the special game execution means MP33 stops the driving of the first large winning opening electric combination C11d of the first large winning opening C10 and closes the first large winning opening C10. Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1733, special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and whether or not the final round is over (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b It is determined whether the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1738, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect of ending the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. (The control command transmission processing in step 1999 is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Then, in step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800). Also in the case of No at step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and after the end of the special game pertaining to the first main game side (the first main game) Determined whether or not after special game pertaining to the jackpot symbol and after special game pertaining to the entry of the game ball to the V winning opening C22 triggered by the stop of the first main game small hit symbol)) Do. If Yes in step 1752, the process moves to step 1755. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in other words, after the end of the special game pertaining to the second main game symbol, in step 1754, the specified game control means MP50 is the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means After the end of the special game winning in the time reduction gaming state with reference to MB11b-C (after the special game pertaining to the second main game jackpot symbol and the stop of the second main game small hit symbol to the V winning opening C22 It is determined whether or not both after the special game pertaining to entering the ball of the game ball is included). If the determination in step 1754 is YES, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1800) (the gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state), and if the determination in step 1754 is NO, the processing proceeds to step 1755. As described above, in the present embodiment, after the end of the special game pertaining to the first main game side, the game state after the end of the special game is determined regardless of the game state at the time of the special game winning. After the end of the special game pertaining to the second main game side, the game state after the end of the special game is determined depending on the gaming state at the time of the special game winning.

  Next, at step 1755, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Next, in steps 1756 and 1758, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next process (step Move to process 1800).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of small hit game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, at step 1801, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and is a discharge standby flag {a flag turned on at step 1822 described later, ie, scheduled Waiting period for discharging game balls remaining in the second large winning opening C20 after the execution of the small hitting game (in particular, the opening pattern of the planned second large winning opening C20) being done It is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on during time) is off. If Yes in step 1801, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in step 1802 to determine whether the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in step 1804. Next, in step 1805, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the second large winning opening C20 of the round in the opening pattern (in this example, for example, in the case of the small hit symbol "2AK": open for 0.73 seconds → closed) Small hit symbol "4AK": Repeat "0.13 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed" three times → open 0.13 seconds → closed, small hit symbol "7AK": 0.13 seconds open → Close for 5.87 seconds → Repeat "Open for 0.13 seconds → Close for 0.87 seconds" twice → Open for 0.25 seconds → Close, for small hit symbol "BK": Open for 0.09 seconds → 5. 91 seconds closing → "0.09 seconds open → 0.91 seconds closed" is repeated five times → 0.09 seconds open → closed). Next, in step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, at step 1807, the small hit game control means MP40 is in the flag area of the distribution prize related information temporary storage means MN60b, the distribution prize work start permission flag (as described later, distribution appointment C23 is Turn on the flag) which is the trigger to operate. Next, at step 1808, at step 1810, the small hit gaming control means MP40 opens the second large winning opening C20 and starts the small hitting gaming timer MP41 t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1809, the small hit gaming control means MP40 starts the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1812. In the present embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, and the discharge standby is performed after a predetermined time (13 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the small hit. Of course, the method of measuring the discharge standby time is not limited to this, for example, the planned small hit game (in particular, the opening of the planned second big winning opening C20) Measurement may be started after execution of the pattern) (In this case, assuming that the discharge standby time is uniform, in the case of the small hit symbol “2AK”, the small hit within the early stage compared with the other. The game will end)).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40 b in step 1810 and determines whether the small hit execution flag is on or not. Do. If Yes in step 1810, then the process moves to step 1812.

  Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the second large winning opening winning combination detecting device C21s to determine whether or not there is a winning (entering) in the second large winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40 b in step 1814, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are held in the second large winning opening C20. It is determined whether there was a In the case of Yes at step 1814, the process goes to step 1818. On the other hand, if No in step 1812 or step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game timer MP41t in step 1816 for a predetermined time (for example, small Hit symbol "2AK": 0.73 seconds open → closed, small hit symbol "4 AK": "0.13 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed" repeated three times → 0.13 seconds open → closed Small hit symbol "7 AK": Open for 0.13 seconds → close for 5.87 seconds → Repeat "open for 0.13 seconds → close for 0.87 seconds" twice → open for 0.25 seconds → close, small hits For symbol "BK": open for 0.09 seconds → close for 5.91 seconds → repeat "open for 0.09 seconds → close for 0.91 seconds" 5 times → time for open for 0.09 seconds → closed)) It is determined whether it has elapsed. If Yes in step 1816, then the process moves to step 1818.

  Next, in step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 stops the driving of the second large winning opening electric combination C21d and closes the second large winning opening C20. Next, in step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the discharge standby flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b (the discharge standby time is started from the main processing execution timing) ), And proceeds to step 1824. Also in the case of No at step 1801, the process proceeds to step 1824.

  Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 and determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (in this example, 13 seconds). . If Yes in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 in step 1825. Next, in step 1826, the small hit gaming control means MP40 turns off the discharge waiting flag in the flag area of the small hitting game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, at step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1900) . Also in the case of No at step 1810, step 1816 or step 1824, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the distribution combination control process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 7. First, at step 1902, the distribution combination object control means MN60 refers to the flag area of the distribution combination thing related information temporary storage means MN60b and determines whether the distribution combination thing operation start permission flag is on or not. . In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the distribution product control means MN 60 turns off the distribution work product activation permission flag in the flag area of the distribution product related information temporary storage module MN 60 b. Next, in step 1906, the distribution object control means MN60 starts the distribution object operation timer MN60t (increment timer). Next, at step 1908, the distribution object control means MN60 turns on the distribution object in-progress flag, which is in the flag area of the distribution object related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, in step 1910, the distribution product control means MN60 operates the distribution product C23 to the second position, and shifts to step 1912. Also in the case of No at step 1902, the process moves to step 1912. Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution character C23 is a first position as an initial position (a position where the portion where the gaming ball is stored is in the upward direction when viewed from the player, and In some cases, when the game ball enters the second big winning opening C20, it is stopped at the position where the entered game ball is stored in the distribution function C23). In addition, the second position is a position where the portion where the gaming ball is stored is in the right direction when viewed from the player (when the gaming ball enters the second big winning opening C20 when it is in that position, the said It is a position where the game ball which entered the ball is not stored by distribution side thing C23).

  Next, at step 1912, the distribution object control means MN60 refers to the flag area of the distribution character article related information temporary storage means MN60b and determines whether the distribution object at work flag is on or not. . In the case of Yes in step 1912, the distribution product control means MN 60 refers to the distribution product operation timer MN 60 t in step 1914, and the timer value is the first operation value (the distribution product is the second position from the second position). It is a timer value that operates to 1 position, and it is the same timing as the opening timing of the 2nd second big winning opening C20 at the time of the small hitting game concerning the small hitting symbol "7AK" and the small hitting symbol "BK", In the present example, it is determined whether or not six seconds has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1914, the distribution product control means MN60 operates the distribution product C23 to the first position in the step 1916, and shifts to the next processing (the processing of the step 1950).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1914, the distribution combination control means MN60 refers to the distribution combination work timer MN60t at step 1918 and the timer value is the second operation value (the distribution combination is at the first position). It is a timer value operated from the second position to the second position, and is a timing at which it is in the discharge standby time for small hit game, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 12 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 1918, in step 1920, the distribution product control means MN60 operates the distribution product C23 to the second position, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1950). In the case where the game ball is stored in the distribution character C23 at the timing of the process of step 1920, the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 triggered by the process.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1918, the distribution combination object control means MN60 refers to the distribution combination product operation timer MN60t at step 1922 and the timer value is the third operation value Is a timer value operated from the first position to the first position, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has reached 12.5 seconds. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the distribution product control means MN60 operates the distribution product C23 to the first position. Next, at step 1926, the distribution object control means MN60 turns off the distribution object in operation flag in the flag area of the distribution object related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, in step 1928, the distribution product control means MN60 clears the distribution product operation timer MN60t to zero, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1950). Also in the case of No in step 1912 or step 1922, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1950).

  Here, the upper right part of the same figure is an illustration of distribution / parts operation. The initial position of the distribution combination C23 is the first position, and operates to the second position at the same time as the small hit game is started, and based on the distribution combination operation timer value, “second position → first position → It is configured to operate from the second position to the initial position (first position). In addition, the distribution combination thing operation timer value becomes the 1st operation value and becomes the 1st position → the game ball enters the second large winning opening C20 → the game ball reaches the distribution function C23 → The game ball is stored in the distribution function C23 → the distribution function operation timer value becomes the second operation value and becomes the second position → the stored game ball enters the V winning opening C22, A big hit (special game) will be induced by performing a series of motions of.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the V winning-in entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. 7. First, at step 1952, the V prize opening control means MN70 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and is a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag turned on at step 1960 described later; It is determined whether or not the flag (which is turned on) when the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the waiting time is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, the V prize opening control means MN 70 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the V prize opening C22 with reference to the V prize opening entrance determining means MJ11-V in step 1954 Do. In the case of Yes in step 1954, the V prize winning opening control means MN 70 is activated in the step 1956 within a valid period of V prize winning opening (period from the start timing of the small hit game to the discharge standby time end timing related to the small hit game) Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1956, the V prize winning opening control means MN 70 transmits a V prize winning detection command (a command for executing V prize winning detection described later) to the sub main control unit SM in step 1958. The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Although not shown, at the main processing execution timing, an error notification is executed when a small hit game pertaining to a small hit symbol ("2 AK" or "4 AK" in this example) which should not enter the V winning opening C22. It is configured to Next, in step 1960, the V prize opening control means MN 70 turns on the condition device activation reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB 20 b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997). Do.

  On the other hand, if the result of step 1952 is NO, then the step of V prize winning opening control means MN 70 is effective period of V prize winning opening (period from the start timing of the small hit game to the discharge standby time end timing of the small hit game). Is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the V prize winning opening control means MN 70 turns on the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB 20 b, and executes the next process (the process of step 1997). Move to). Also in the case of No in step 1954, step 1956 or step 1962, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). Also, in the case of No at step 1956, in other words, when the risk of unauthorized ball entry such as game ball entering the V winning opening C22 increases despite the fact that the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable to be configured to execute error processing as appropriate. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game concerning entering the ball into the V winning opening C22 is "15R", and a series of flows of "a special game concerning entering a small hitting game → V winning opening C22" is totaled Then, it is "16R" with "1R" of the round number which concerns on a small hit game, and "15R" of the round number which concerns on a special game.

  Next, control processing executed on the side of the sub main control unit SM will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 22 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 5D is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information When received → Initialize the sub-side RAM, when various information commands are received → Resetting related information at power-off to the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing that repeatedly executes (e), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM. Here, when (e) is executed, as shown in the process of (e) in the figure, first, in step 2050, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM displays a right-handed instruction display described later Execute control processing. Next, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a holding information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decoration symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a V winning detection effect display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes special game related display control processing described later. Next, in step 2700, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (sends the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), End the repeat processing routine.

  As described above, the sub main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub main routine (S2050 to S2700) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6F is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (f) when it is connected. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives a command input port from the main control board M side ( Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above. Then, at step 2006, based on the check result, the sub main control unit SM sends a command sent from the main control board M to the RAM on the sub main control unit SM side (for example, main side information temporary storage means SM11 b). Are temporarily stored, and the process returns to the process that was being performed immediately before this interrupt process.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of right-turning instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the right-handed command display control unit SM26 refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the right-turning instruction display control unit SM26 sets a command to display the first right-turning instruction display and the second right-turning instruction display (in , And transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). The right-handed instruction display (the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display) is also displayed during the fluctuation fixed time (long-time fluctuation fixed time) in the time-saving gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2052, at step 2056, the right-handed command display control means SM26 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a small hit game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2056, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2057, and the small hit symbol relating to the small hit currently being executed is "2AK" (second large It is a small hit symbol that the winning opening C20 will be opened only once, and it is not a case designed to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning opening C22 by the control operation of the distributing combination C23 described above. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2057, the process shifts to step 2054. Here, to supplement the processing, if the small hit symbol pertaining to the small hit currently being executed is "2AK", the right hit indication display is not displayed, so the player has a small hit. While it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is being executed on the appearance, when the small hit symbol pertaining to the currently running small hit is "4AK" or "7AK", a right-handed indication display is displayed. For the player, it can be easily recognized in appearance whether or not a small hit is being executed. In addition, even if the small hit symbol concerning the small hit currently being executed is "4 AK", it is designed to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning opening C22 by the control operation of the sorting combination C23 mentioned above. In this case, if the small hit symbol pertaining to the currently running small hit is “7 AK” (by the control operation of the distribution character C23 described above, the game ball to the V winning opening C22 Since the same processing (processing for displaying a right-handed instruction display) is executed as in the case where the player is designed to enter the ball, the player performs right-handing while expecting a jackpot to be induced for the player. (The game ball is fired toward the second big winning opening C20). In addition, even if the small hit symbol for the small hit currently being executed is "2AK", it may be configured to display a right-handed indication display, in such a case, the right for "2AK" It is desirable to configure the hit instruction display to be less visible (not noticeable) for the player than the right hit instruction display associated with other small hit symbols. Also, even if it is the same small hit symbol, the display mode of the right-handed indication may be different depending on the gaming state at the time of the small hit symbol winning, for example, the right during the small hit game related to "2AK" In the non-time reduction gaming state, when the winning instruction display is won in the small hit game relating to "2AK", the right-handed instruction display is not executed as in the small hit game start as in the start of the small hit game. If you win the small hit game related to "2AK", you may execute the first right hitting indication display as before the small hit game start, during the small hit game related to "4AK" and "7AK" The right-handed instruction display is a player more than the case where the right-handed instruction display is won in the time-saving gaming state when the small-hit game pertaining to “4AK” or “7AK” is won in the non-time shortening gaming state To be displayed with high visibility for It may form. Here, the visibility refers to the transmittance and the display area occupancy ratio as to how much of the entire display area SG10 is occupied, etc., and not only the visibility but also the sound and the effect light emission mode may be made different. (It may be the presence or absence of sound or effect light).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2056 or step 2057, in step 2058, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub sub control unit SS side). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2058, at step 2062, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for erasing the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display (display command transmission control process of step 2700) , And transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Here, the upper right part of the same figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed indication display. The first right-turning indication display and the second right-turning indication display are displayed at positions not overlapping on the effect display device SG. In addition, since the situation where the second right-handed instruction display is displayed is larger than the situation where only the first right-handed instruction display is displayed, the player's profit loss is larger when the right-handed action is not performed. The second right-handed instruction display is configured to be more easily visible (prominent) to the player than the first right-handed instruction display. In the present embodiment, two types of right-handling indication display (first right-handling indication display and second right-handling indication display) are used, but the invention is not limited thereto, and three or more types may be provided, for example, time In the reduced gaming state, "transition to time reduced gaming state → fluctuation related to small hit → small hit game start → first opening of the second large winning opening C20 → second opening of the second large winning opening C20 → small hit The first right-handed instruction display (in the same display mode as this embodiment) is displayed in the entire series of flows, and (1) at the transition timing to the time-saving gaming state , The second right-handed indication display (for example, the display mode of the red arrow pointing to the right which is a display larger than the first right-handed indication display), and the fluctuation start timing (or the fluctuation related to the small hit) Variation related to a certain timing or small hit At the fixed time start timing, etc., the second right strike instruction display is erased, and the third right strike instruction display (for example, the display of a right-pointed giraffe pattern arrow which is a display larger than the first right strike instruction display) A mode is displayed, and after the start of fluctuation related to small hit and before the start of small hit game, the third right hit indication display is erased, and the fourth right hit indication display (for example, second main game start) Display mode to prompt the launch of the game ball toward the mouth electric role B11d) after the first opening of the second large winning opening C20, and before the second opening of the second large winning opening C20 At the timing of (4), the fourth right strike instruction display is erased, and the fifth right strike instruction display (for example, a display mode prompting the launch of the game ball toward the second big winning opening C20) is displayed, (2) Second right at the transition timing to the time saving gaming state Display indication (for example, display mode of a red arrow pointing to the right, which is a display larger than the first right strike indication display) is displayed, and fluctuation start timing related to small hitting (or a certain timing during fluctuation related to small hitting, Alternatively, the second right-handed indication display is erased at a variation fixed time start timing, etc. related to a small hit, and a third right-handed indication display (for example, a rightward facing indication that is larger than the first right-handed indication display) Display the arrow with giraffe pattern) and delete the 3rd right hit indication display at the timing before the start of small hit game and after the variation start concerning small hit, 4th right hit indication display ( For example, a display for notifying the player that the high profit state continues is displayed, and after the first opening of the second large winning opening C20, and the second opening of the second large winning opening C20. 4th right-handed instruction at the previous timing The display may be erased, and a third right-handed instruction display (for example, a display mode of a right-pointed giraffe-pattern-shaped arrow which is a display larger than the first right-handed instruction display) may be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of pending information management processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command relating to the new hold generation from the main control board M side (first main game symbol or second main It is determined whether or not hold information pertaining to the game symbol has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, A maximum of four for the second main game is added "1". Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily sends a command concerning the new hold success / failure result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Store and move to step 2118.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2102, at step 2111, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2111, in step 2112 the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the holding information (in particular, the result of the pass / fail, stop symbol information, fluctuation mode information) related to the symbol change from the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. And shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, and proceeds to step 2118. Also in the case of No at step 2111, the process proceeds to step 2118.

  Next, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 stores the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13). The suspension display lamps of the same number as the rendering suspension counter value of are displayed in an ON state, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). In the present embodiment, under the situation where the game proceeds by mainly repeating the first main game symbol variation display and stop display (under the situation of non-time shortening game), special with the stop display of the jackpot symbol Under the situation where the game proceeds by mainly repeating the variation display and the stop display of the second main game symbol (under the situation of time shortening game), the game characteristics of the small main hit symbol The main game side and the first main game side and the first main game side because the special game is executed mainly due to the small hit game being executed triggered by the stop display and entering the V winning opening C22 as a trigger. 2 The basic gameplay differs from the main game player. Therefore, when the hold display lamp is lighted and displayed, only the hold display of the first main game is executed under the non-time shortening game situation, and the second main game is held under the time shortening game situation It is preferable to be configured to execute display only. However, in the present embodiment, even when the second main game is still held even under the situation of non-time shortening game, the special game triggered by the stop display of the further small hit symbol Under such circumstances, only the hold display on the second main game side is executed (or the hold display on the second main game side is more visible than the hold display on the first main game side). It is more preferable to be configured to increase the quality, and after a big hit (a big hit related to entering a ball into the V winning opening C22) triggered by a small hit won in the time-saving gaming state (or after time completion) Executes only the hold display on the second main game side (or the hold display on the second main game side is the first main game side) when transitioning to the non-time shortening game state to the non-time shortening game state in the gaming state Visibility is higher than the pending display) It is even more preferred to keep. Incidentally, regardless of the gaming state, it may be configured to display both the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side, and in such a case, the non-time reduction will occur. Under the situation where it is a game, the first main game's hold display has higher visibility than the second main game's hold display, and under the time reduction game, the second main game's hold display is the first It is desirable to be configured so that the visibility is higher than the hold display on the main game side.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the figure display content determination means SM21 n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21 b. Next, in step 2206, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not it is currently in the time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2206, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 2208, and determines whether or not the change is a symbol variation related to the first main game symbol Do. In the case of Yes in step 2208, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, reach effect display content determination means SM25n) is temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2210 The stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, the stop symbol pertaining to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol with reference to the symbol information (the stop symbol / variation aspect pertaining to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta In the case of Zorozume such as "7 · 7 · 7", and in the case of a lost symbol, such as "ケ · · · · 5 etc." and the variation aspect {eg, variation related to the main game symbol If the mode is short-term fluctuation, non-reach, if it is long-term fluctuation, normal reach or super reach etc.} is determined and drawing display related information temporary storage means S 21b (and informational display related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b) temporarily stored in, the process proceeds to step 2216.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2208, in step 2212 the device display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, reach effect display content determination means SM25n) temporarily displays in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined with reference to the stored symbol information (the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main gaming symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and the variation mode is simulated continuous variation ( (1) Decide on a mode that involves temporary stop of the decorative symbol being executed multiple times during the change, and display display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and advance notice related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect related information temporary storage It temporarily stores in the means SM 25 b), and proceeds to step 2216.

  Here, the lower part of the same figure is an image diagram of the fluctuation accompanied by the pseudo continuous fluctuation. Here, “this change” is a series of operations from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol for the first time to the final stop display of the decorative symbol (finally depending on the stop display mode) The "simulated change" is a variable content, and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the temporary display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The "final simulated change" is the change to be started, and after the start of the change display of the decoration symbol, the stop display of the decoration symbol is made to notify the result of the decision definitely and start the change display of the decoration symbol anew It is a change that does not The "decorative symbol changeable period" is a period in which the decorative symbol can be variably displayed (including the start of a new variable display), and is the same as the period of "this fluctuation". Also, the "decorative symbol non-vulnerable period" is a period during which the decorative symbol does not start a new variable display (since the result of the decision has already been informed by the stop symbol of the decorative symbol) to the player. It is configured to further execute an effect of definitely notifying that it will be a big hit. In addition, as shown in the same figure, in the variable displayable period, effects relating to the same decorative symbol are executed from the start of the change in the case of loss and in the case of big hit or small hit (temporary stop related to pseudo change An effect to be performed twice is performed. In addition, the purpose of performing such pseudo-continuous change is that if the second main game side is still held even under the situation of non-time shortening game, the stop display of the further small hit symbol Because it is a construction that can be expected to the execution of the special game triggered by the reason, because it is an effect aimed to get the feeling of expectation, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped for each simulated change is For example, when a small hit symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed within the remaining second main game side hold (or the corresponding symbol variation), the so-called chance display is stopped ("" It is preferable to configure the special arrangement of 1 · 2.3 · etc. to be stopped and displayed with a higher probability than when the small hit symbol is not stopped and displayed. In addition, also in the fluctuation which relates to the 1st main game side it is possible to execute the fluctuation which involves the pseudo continuous fluctuation, in such a case, the frequency of the pseudo continuous fluctuation is relative rather than the fluctuation which relates to the 2nd main game side The execution frequency of the fluctuation with a small number of times or with the pseudo continuous fluctuation is small {ie, the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the first main game side occurs only in the non-time shortening gaming state (or from the time shortening gaming state Also, the frequency of occurrence of the first main gaming side pseudo continuous variation during the non-time shortening gaming state is the frequency of occurrence of the second main gaming side pseudo continuous variation during the non-time shortening gaming state It is desirable to configure to be lower}. In addition, in the fluctuation accompanied by the pseudo continuous fluctuation concerning the second main game side, when the fluctuation is the fluctuation concerning big hit or small hit, 15 seconds before the decorative symbol fluctuation possible time elapses (for example, the pseudo fluctuation The decorative symbol may be configured to stop at the first temporary stop timing).

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2206 is No, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, reach effect display content determination means SM25n) continues the production mode in the previous special game in step 2214 Display mode {to display the decorative symbol is not visible or visible (not noticeable) even if it is displayed, the number of acquired game balls displayed in the previous special game is also continuously displayed, and such According to the configuration, the player determines that the special game continues as the special game continues even though the special game is not being executed, and proceeds to step 2216.

  Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determination unit SM21 n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage unit SM21 b, and the next processing (processing of step 2300) Transition. Also in the case of No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on a symbol variation in progress flag within the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2308, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM 21t, and proceeds to step 2310. Also in the case of No at step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol variation flag is on or not. In the case of Yes in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the dressing variation time management timer SM 21t in step 2312. Next, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the dressing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the dressing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the decorative symbol in step 2316 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2700). , Shift to step 2330.

  On the other hand, in case of No at step 2314, at step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is a decoration based on the dressing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol in step 2320 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub sub control unit SS side Sent to).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2318, at step 2322, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) changes the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM 25 b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2322, in step 2324, the notice effect display control means SM 24 (and reach effect display control means SM 25) sets an image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2700) , Transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Also in the case of No at step 2322, the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol in step 2332 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2700) Be done). Next, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the dressing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2350) Do. Also in the case of No in step 2310 or step 2330, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2350).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, at step 2352, the V prize detection effect display control means SM27 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the V prize detection command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes at step 2352, V prize detection effect display control means SM27 at step 2354 is an effect to notify the player that the game ball has entered the V prize opening C 22 (this example) Then, “V” is displayed on the effect display device SG and a command relating to the effect of turning on the V lamp V10 is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2352, the V prize detection effect display control means SM27 determines whether or not the big hit symbol stop command has been received from the main side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b at step 2356 . In the case of Yes at step 2356, the V prize detection effect display control means SM 27 determines that the game ball entered the V prize detection effect (V prize opening C22) after a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed at step 2358 This is an effect of notifying the player of the effect, and in this example, a command relating to an effect of lighting the V lamp V10 and displaying “V” on the effect display device SG is set, and the next process (step 2400) Move to As described above, in the present embodiment, the V prize detection effect is executed also at the time of the big hit concerning the main game symbol, and the consistency of the effect with the big hit time for the V prize is secured. In addition, at the time of big hit concerning the main game design. In fact, since the game ball has not entered the V winning opening C22, the V winning detection effect may not be executed. Also in the case of No at step 2356, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, at step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game in progress flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM 23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM 23 b in step 2406 and step 2408, and the effect display device A big hit start display is performed on the SG (a display is appropriately made based on the type of big hit), and the process shifts to step 2412. Also in the case of No at step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of acquired game balls on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side Based on the type of jackpot, etc., it may be carried out as appropriate. In addition, the number of acquired game balls displayed in this processing is the total from the special game pertaining to the first main gaming side in the normal gaming state until all the suspension of the second main gaming side is digested in the normal gaming state The number of acquired game balls (the total number of game balls acquired during consecutive runs).

  Next, in step 2420, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes at step 2420, the background effect display control means SM23 executes a big hit end display (appropriately displays based on the type of the big hit) on the effect display device SG at step 2421. Next, in step 2422, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2700). . Also in the case of No in step 2404 or step 2420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a timing chart according to game progress from the first main game big hit winning in the present embodiment. In particular, after the first main game big hit symbol is stopped in the non-time shortening gaming state, and the special game is executed twice, the action diagram in the case of winning the small hit concerning the second main game in the non-time shortening gaming state It is. In the action diagram, the fluctuation fixing time is illustrated only for a long time (30 seconds in this example), and is not illustrated for a short time (0.2 seconds in this example). In this action diagram, it is assumed that the game is switched from left to right after timing 1 and the game ball is continuously fired continuously (one shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds) from right at all times thereafter. .

  First, in the non-time shortening gaming state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the special game of 4R (1st big winning game) is triggered by the fact that the first main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol "7A". A special game pertaining to the opening of the mouth C10 is executed.

  Next, at timing 2 in the drawing, the execution of the special game ends, and the gaming state becomes the time-saving gaming state due to the end of the special game relating to the first main game side. Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, the variation fixed time of a long time (in this example, 30 seconds) starts when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol "BK". Be done. In the present embodiment, it is configured that the maximum number (four) of second main game holdings can be caused almost certainly by the long-term fluctuation fixed time.

  Next, at timing 4 in the drawing, a small hit game relating to the stopped small hit symbol “BK” is started, triggered by the end of the fluctuation fixed time. Next, at the timing 5 in the figure, during the small hit game being executed, the gaming ball is stored in the distribution function C23 in the second large winning opening C20, and the discharge pertaining to the small hit game being executed During the waiting time, the sorting product C23 is moved to the second position to enter the V winning opening C22. Incidentally, the V winning detection effect described above is executed by entering the V winning opening C22. Next, at timing 6 in the drawing, the small hit game is ended, and the special game of 15R is executed triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game.

  Next, at timing 7 in the figure, the 15R special game ends, and the special game is a special game pertaining to the second main game, and a small hit game winning that the special game is to be won Because the gaming state at the time is the time saving gaming state, the gaming state becomes the non-time shortening gaming state. In addition, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is started.

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, a small hit game related to the "BK" is started when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol "BK". In addition, since the gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state, the fluctuation fixed time according to “BK” is a short time (0.2 seconds in this example). Next, at the timings of 9 and 10 in the figure, like the timings of 5 and 6 in the above-mentioned figure, the entry of the game ball to the V winning opening C22, the end of the small hit game and the start of the special game are executed. Ru.

  Next, at timing 11 in the figure, the 15R special game ends, and the special game is a special game pertaining to the second main game, and a small hit game winning which is to be elected for the special game Because the gaming state at the time is the non-time shortening gaming state, the gaming state becomes the time shortening gaming state. In addition, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is started.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability relating to the second main game is set to a high probability (about 1/6 in this example), In the game, the game ball can be entered almost certainly into the V winning opening C22, and after the special game concerning the small hit is finished based on the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning concerning the second main game. By configuring to determine the gaming state, first, if you win a big hit pertaining to the first main game, in the time-saving game state after the big hit is over "small hit → V winning related to the second main game The special game for the mouth C22 will be won, and the second main game hold for which the maximum number (4 in this example) has been raised in the time-saving game state is for the V prize hole C22. It is erased in the non-time shortening game state after the special game end By being, a new winner of the "special game according to the Koatari → V winning hole C22 according to the second main game" is the ability to automatically expected. That is, every time a small hit is won before all the suspension of the second main game remaining in the non-time-saving gaming state is completed, two big hit game balls are awarded to the player. It will be possible to realize innovative gameplay.

  Note that the gaming machine in this example may be configured to have the sub main control unit SM a real time clock RTC that keeps clocking the current time by the built-in power supply. Here, the real time clock RTC is a mechanism provided on the base of the sub main control unit SM for performing time counting. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) that is independent of the base, and it keeps time while power is not supplied to the gaming machine, so the date and time set at factory shipment etc It is possible to supply the current date and time based on

  Also, in the present embodiment, during the special game won in the time reduction game state (or non-time reduction game state), a small number of (for example, three) or more small hits are won within the second main game hold. It is substantially fixed that a plurality of special games will be executed after the special game is over (when there is a reservation to be scheduled to be held). Effect may be provided to the player, the effect may be, for example, using a real-time clock RTC to notify the player of the date and time when the effect was started. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the feeling that the effect with low frequency of appearance and the fact that the acquisition of a large amount of balls is substantially determined is assigned at the current timing. Note that the effect may be executed when there is a scheduled hold of winning a predetermined number (for example, three) or more small hits within the second main game hold, but within the second main game hold It is desirable to be configured not to be executed when there is a scheduled hold for winning a predetermined number (for example, three or more) of jackpots. In addition, since the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of special games can be consecutively executed upon being hit by a small hit, during the special game, it is a big hit in the second main game hold In the case where there is a hold, the effect of informing the presence of the hold may not be performed.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, new game characteristics are realized by making the transition tendency (especially, the presence or absence of transition) of the gaming state after the end of the special game different between the first main game side and the second main game side. Although this new playability variation is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration for showing another gameplay variation, which is different from the present embodiment, is taken as a first modification example of the present embodiment, and only the changed points from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Although the first modification from the present embodiment is a modification based on the present embodiment, it can be applied to the other embodiments (this embodiment as well as the second embodiment and later). I will add that it is.

  First, FIG. 30 is a game progress flowchart in the first modification from the present embodiment. A characteristic feature of the first modification from the present embodiment is that a plurality of types are provided as the number of time reductions that can be selected on the first main game side and the second main game side (in particular, the second main game side is It is preferable to provide a large number of time savings). The flow of the game shown in the game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Playing progress flow 1>
In the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game start port electric role B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to be opened, so-called non-power support state), the player starts the first main game start Aim the mouth A10 and shoot the game ball (make a so-called left strike) to proceed with the game. Then, if you win the big hit lottery on the 1st main game side (in this example, the big hit probability = 1/256), which is performed triggered by entering the ball into the 1st main game start slot A10, it will be shown in the figure The first main game jackpot is won ", and after the symbol change of the first main game symbol based on the win is finished (after the big hit symbol of the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed), the predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for 10 rounds is executed (in this example, the first large winning opening C10 is opened, and "15 prize balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" per round) it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <playing progress flow 1> ends, the "rush challenge zone" (second main game start opening electric role thing B11d shown in the figure is a gaming state that is likely to be in the open state, By shifting to a so-called power support state = time reduction state, the player aims at the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d and fires a game ball (by performing a so-called right hit) to advance the game. , The second main game start opening B10 can be entered efficiently (with the ball entering the second main game start opening B10 as a trigger, it is a symbol of the winning lottery on the second main game side and the second main game symbol Fluctuations are made). Here, the "rush challenge zone" is counted after the end of the special game executed in <playing progress flow 1>, and the number of times the symbol variation of the first main gaming symbol or the second main gaming symbol has been performed Although the game continues at least until the predetermined number of times is reached, the number of times set as the predetermined number of times is the first predetermined number of times (after the end of the special game executed in <game progression flow 1> In this example, either 7) or the second predetermined number (100 in this example) is set {in this example, the ratio of the first predetermined number being set: the second predetermined number is The ratio to be set is 99: 1, and typically, the number of times determined in accordance with the type related to the jackpot symbol of the first main gaming symbol stopped and displayed in <game progression flow 1> is set Such a percentage difference (occupancy rate Configured to occur}.

<Game progress flow 3>
The small main lottery on the second main game side (in this example, the small hit probability = 1/15 in this example) will be shown in the figure, when it wins the small main lottery on the second main game side, which is triggered by entering the second main game start port B10 The second main game small hit is won ", and after the symbol change of the second main game symbol based on the selected is finished (after the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), for one round A small hit game is executed (in this example, the second large winning opening C20 is opened, but when configured as in the present embodiment, the game ball aims at the second large winning opening C20. If it is continuously fired, entering the ball into the V winning hole C22 becomes almost definite). Then, after the small hit game is over, the predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, 4 rounds or 15 rounds will be distributed (due to entering the ball into the C prize winning slot C22), but typically it is Such a difference in distribution is generated by setting the maximum number of rounds determined in accordance with the type of the second main game symbol small hit symbol, and the maximum number of rounds is a small hit game The number of rounds is the sum of the number of one round of opening the second large winning opening C20 pertaining to and the number of rounds of opening the first large winning opening C10 pertaining to the special game executed triggered by the small hit) A big hit (from the small hit game to a special game triggered by the small hit game is called a big hit) (in this example, in the special game triggered by a small hit, the first big winning opening C10 Is open If you can earn "15 prize balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" per round, and the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, roughly 500 including the game balls obtained in the small hit game If the degree remains as a player's ball, and the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, approximately 1900 pieces including the game ball obtained in the small hit game remain as the player's ball). In addition, when a special game is started triggered by a small hit, and the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 10R, one round of the small hit game (the second big winning opening C20 opens) when the predetermined maximum round number is 10R. The predetermined maximum round is 10 rounds for 9 rounds of the started special game (the first big winning opening C10 is open).

<Game progress flow 4>
When the special game executed in the above <game progression flow 3> is ended, the "rush zone" (second main game start opening electric role thing B11d shown in the figure is a game state that is likely to be in the open state, so-called Since the state shifts to the power support state = time reduction state, the player aims at the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d and shoots the game ball (by performing a so-called right hit) to advance the game, It is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 (at the entrance of the second main game start opening B10 as a trigger, symbol variation of the second main game side and symbol variation of the second main game symbol Is done). Here, the "rush zone" is counted after the end of the special game executed in <game progression flow 3>, and the number of times the symbol variation of the first main gaming symbol or the second main gaming symbol has been made is Although the number of times set as the specific number of times is at least the first specific number of times (this is the number of times the special number of times has been set in the game progress flow 3). In the example, 10 times), the second specified number (in this example, 20 times), the third specified number (in this example, 30 times), the fourth specified number (in this example, 50 times) Any one of the specified number of times 5 (in this example, 100 times) is set {In this example, the ratio of the first number being set: the ratio of the second number being set: the third number being set Percentage: The fourth number is set Percentage: the fifth number is set Match = 43: 20: 17: 13: 7 and is typically determined according to the type pertaining to the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol displayed stopped in <Game Progress Flow 3>. By setting the number of times, it is configured to generate such a percentage difference (occupancy)}. Then, under the situation where the "rush zone" continues, <the game progress flow 3> occurs (as shown in the figure, the probability of staying small in the "rush zone" with an average probability of 78%) If it is possible to win a win, it will be <playing progress flow 4>, and since the transition to the "rush zone" will be made again, the player will be able to win a large number of balls by this looping property.

<Game progress flow 5>
When reaching the predetermined number (7 or 100 in this example), which is the number of possible continuations of the "rush challenge zone", the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state (the second main game starting port electric It is a gaming state where it is difficult for the bonus B11d to be in the open state, and it becomes a so-called non-power support state), but the number of holding upper limit of the second main game side triggered by entering the second main game start port B10 Since the (second main game holding upper limit number) is "4", the second main game side holding (which may occur up to the second main game holding upper limit number) remains at the time when the normal gaming state is reached Even if <playing progress flow 3> occurs at the time of digestion, <playing progress flow 4> is also obtained, and it is almost deterministic to shift to the "rush zone" (the second main player in consideration of this event as well) Small hit rate on the game side It is described in the drawing). Similarly, if the specified number of times (in this example, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, or 100 times in this case) which is the possible number of times of continuation of the "rush zone" is reached, The game state is normally the game state (the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is a game state that is unlikely to be opened state, so-called non-power support state), but to the second main game start opening B10 Since the upper limit number of holding on the second main game side (the second main game holding upper limit number) that occurs upon entering the ball is “4”, it remains when the normal gaming state is reached (second main game (second main game) Even when <game progress flow 3> occurs at the time of hold digest on the second main game side that can occur up to the game hold upper limit number, it becomes <game progress flow 4> and it is approximate to move to the "rush zone" again It becomes definite (this event is added In case, Koatari winning rate in the second main player side is described in the figure).

<Game progress flow 6>
If the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (7 or 100 in this example), which is the number of possible continuations of the "rush challenge zone", is reached, and the second main gaming side remains at the time of the normal gaming state If <playing progress flow 3> has not occurred at the time of the end of all of the reservations, the processing shifts to “normal game” shown in the drawing. Also, similarly, when the specified number of times (in this example, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, or 100 times in this case) which is the number of possible continuations of the "rush zone" is reached, and When <game progress flow 3> does not occur at the time of the end of the second main game side remaining at the time of entering the gaming state, transition to the “normal game” shown in the figure. Do.

<Irregular game progress flow>
In <game progression flow 1>, the small main lottery on the first main game side (in this example, the small probability of 1 = 65,536) is also triggered upon entering the first main game start slot A10. If the player wins the small hit lottery, it becomes the “first main game small hit winning” shown in the figure, and the small hit game for one round is executed (for example, also in the small hit game in this case, the first (2) open the big winning opening C20) and, after the small hitting game ends, the special game for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (due to entering the ball to the V winning opening C22) is executed It is also possible to configure. In addition, when the special game is over, it is possible to make a transition to the "rush challenge zone" shown in the figure. Here, the handling in the case of winning the small hit lottery on the first main game side is not particularly limited, but in the case of being configured to be elected with an extremely low probability as in this example, If the game ball is continuously fired at the second big winning opening C20 at the time of execution, it is preferable that the entry into the V winning opening C22 be substantially definite. In addition, after the small hitting game ends, the special game for the set maximum round number (for example, 15 rounds) is executed, and also the above-mentioned predetermined number which is the number of times of possible continuation of "rush challenge zone" It is preferable to set the maximum number that can be set (for example, 100 times). Also, in the time-saving gaming state ("rush challenge zone" or "rush zone"), winning a big hit with a small hit on the second main game side will be the flow to increase the main ball holding If, in the time-saving game state, the second main game is won without a small hit, the number of time reductions after the end of the special game is the maximum number (100 in this example). Etc., it is desirable to relatively favor (increase) the number of times shorter than after the big hit via small hit.

  In addition, the configuration of the modification example 1 from this embodiment is: (1) The average value of the number of times after the big hit end when the big hit (or the small hit) is won in "normal time" In the "Rash Challenge Zone", "Rash Zone"), if the jackpot is won (or a small hit), the average value of the number of times after the big hit is less than the average value of the number of shorting times (2) Time reduction number of times after the big hit is related to the time-saving gaming state ("rush challenge zone", "rush zone") than when winning the big hit (or the big hit triggered by a small hit) at "normal time" There are more cases in which the player wins the jackpot (or the jackpot triggered by the small hit), (3) when the jackpot (or small hit) of the second main game is won in the “normal” (for example, ,time The average value of the number of time savings after the big hit ends, when the big game is hit by the remaining suspension of the second main gaming side when the reduced gaming state ends and becomes "normal time"), When the player wins a big hit (or a small hit) on the first main game side in the "normal time", it is configured to be more than the average value of the number of time savings after the big hit.

  In the first modification from the present embodiment, the special game transition right is acquired (at the time of stop of the big hit symbol, at the end of the small hit game when entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game, etc.) A big hit may be started by entering the game ball into the ball opening, and the number of times after the big hit is determined by entering the game ball into the specific entry (for example, the specific It may be configured to be determined by lottery when the game ball enters the ball entrance. By configuring in this way, by visually recognizing the small hit symbol at the time of small hit, the number of time reductions after the big hit that is triggered by the small hit is determined by the player, and the game ball in the V winning opening C22 It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player determines which is advantageous depending on whether or not to enter the ball.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, regardless of which of the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side is caused by the drawing Also, regardless of whether it is the result of winning a big hit lottery or the occurrence of a small hit game, after the end of the special game, it is always configured to shift to the so-called power support state Although it is configured to be variable with respect to a period during which the power support state is maintained, and at least when a small hit game occurs while the power support state is maintained, Since the special game is configured to be definite as well, the game property is whether or not it is possible to generate a small hit game in a period in which the power support state is maintained. Since the small hit probability is always constant, it is possible to create a new playability variation in which a situation advantageous to the player is constructed as the period for which the power support state is maintained is longer. It becomes.

  In addition, it is desirable to configure such that the player is not notified of the period in which the power support state can be maintained (in other words, the number of time reductions set after the end of the special game) because of such game characteristics. By configuring in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation as to how long the power support state is maintained (from the end of the special game until the change) and the fun of the game is It will increase. In addition, as the effect relating to the time reduction number, an effect may be performed that makes the time reduction number appear to the player as increasing, for example, in the case where the time reduction number set after the end of the special game is 50 times At the end of the special game, "10 times" is displayed as the remaining short time, and in the 10th symbol fluctuation (the symbol fluctuation which will be 0 times remaining) (or at the timing before the 10th fluctuation), By displaying as “+40 times”, it is possible to illustrate an effect that makes it appear as if the number of time savings has increased. In addition, the configuration is applicable to any of the "rush challenge zone" and the "rush zone". For example, when the number of times of time reduction in the "rush challenge zone" is 100, the "lash challenge" is applicable. At the start of the zone, "7 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times at the start of the zone, and with the seventh symbol variation (the symbol variation that becomes the remaining 0 times) (or at the timing before the seventh variation), "+93 It may be configured to display “times” (or “remains still” and then display the remaining number of times). In the case where the number of time reductions in the "rush challenge zone" is 100 times, the remaining number of time reductions may be displayed as "100 times" from the start of the "rush challenge zone", The "rush zone" may be displayed from the start of the "rush challenge zone", and the same effect mode as during the "rush zone" stay may be displayed.

  Also, the presentation mode may be different between staying in the "rush challenge zone" and in the "rush zone" (a presentation mode in which "the rush zone" is perceived as higher profit is desirable. ), In the "lash challenge zone", when the number of time reductions is 100 times, the number of time reductions is the same as the number of time reductions that is the maximum in the "lash zone", which is a high profit for the player, It may be configured to perform the same effect as during the "rush zone" stay. In addition, it may be configured to execute both the configuration that performs the same effect as during the “rush zone” stay and the configuration that performs the effect that appears as if the number of time reductions described above has increased. The effect mode performed in the "rush challenge zone" is "effect mode A", and the effect mode performed in the "rush zone" is "effect mode B", and the number of time saving is 100 times in the "rush challenge zone" In this case, when the "lash challenge zone" starts, "7 times" is displayed as the remaining number of short times, and the effect mode to be executed is "effect mode A", and the seventh symbol variation (remaining 0 times) In the symbol variation) (or at the timing before the 7th variation), display "+93 times" (or display "still still" and then display the remaining number of shorts), and then, The effect is produced, which is the row may be configured to as "representation embodiment B".

  In addition, the small hit election probability (in this example, normal gaming state, time shortening gaming state, both 1/15 in the modification example 1 from this embodiment) is the big hit election probability in the normal gaming state The winning rate is 10 times or more (in this example, 1/256). That is, as a method for increasing the occurrence frequency of special games in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, there is one having a so-called probability change function (function to increase the jackpot win probability itself), but the jackpot probability in this probability change function It is customary to set the upper limit that can be raised to less than 10 times the original big hit winning probability, and if adopting a configuration such as the first modification from the present embodiment, the frequency is higher than the upper limit. It is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the game.

  In the first modification of this embodiment, if the first main gaming side is won in the time-saving gaming state, the number of time savings after the big end is the same as that for the second main gaming side. (Assignment of the number of times) (may be configured to shift to the "rush zone"). Moreover, the number of time reductions after the big hit end of the second main game side (including after the big hit end triggered by the small hit) is the game state at the time of winning the big hit (or the small hit triggered by the big hit), The number of times may be the same (allocation of the number of times).

(Modification 2 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the first modification from the present embodiment, as described in <playing progress flow 4>, the "rush zone" (the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is a game state that is likely to be in the open state, The so-called power support state = time reduction state) is counted from the end of the special game executed in <game progression flow 3>, and the number of times the symbol variation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is performed Is configured to continue at least until the specific number of times is reached, but the number of times set as the specific number of times is typically the second displayed stopped in <game progress flow 3> The number of times set in accordance with the type related to the small hitting symbol of the main game symbol may be set. In this case, when the player confirms the type of the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol that has been stopped and displayed, the set is scheduled to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit of the second main game symbol. If the specific number of times (ie, the number of time continuations to be set) is relatively small, the game ball is entered into the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game. The game is not played (the game is a so-called stop-and-go strategy, and the player can get a chance to be newly stopped and displayed when the number of relatively short-duration times is relatively large), the design payout rate There is a concern that the above payout rate may be derived. Of course, there are several ways to avoid such a situation, for example, if the number of short durations is relatively small, increase the number of winning balls (for example, the maximum number of rounds) obtained by the special game. Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening C20 immediately after the start of the small hitting game is induced to the V winning opening C22. However, since it is also possible to incorporate performing the above-described stop and clash as one game characteristic as a reverse idea, a configuration for illustrating such game characteristic is a modification example 2 from the present embodiment. Hereinafter, only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail. Although the second modification from the present embodiment is a modification based on the present embodiment, it can be applied to the other embodiments (this embodiment as well as the second embodiment and later). I will add that it is.

  First, FIG. 31 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub control substrate S (in particular, the side of the sub main control unit SM) in the second modification of this embodiment. The change point from this embodiment is step 2550 (f. 2), and the purpose thereof is a game state in which the second main game start opening electric role B11d is likely to be in an open state, so-called power support state = time saving state The present invention is configured to notify the player of a remaining period that can be continued. That is, in step 2550 (mod. 2), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the remaining time short display control process described later, and shifts to step 2050.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the remaining time short display control process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (mod 2) in FIG. 31 in the second modification of this embodiment. First, in step 2552, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the current time shortening game state (so-called power support state) is in effect. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554 the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to notify the remaining number of shorts (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2050). On the other hand, if No in step 2552, in step 2556, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for deleting the notification of the remaining number of shorts (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, to the sub sub control unit SS side). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2050). In addition, in the example 2 of change from this embodiment, in the time reduction game state (so-called power support state), it is configured to notify the remaining number of times of short, and as will be described later, the small hit of the second main game symbol If the symbol is stopped and displayed, the number of time reductions scheduled to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit of the second main gaming symbol is notified, but based on the remaining number of time reductions reported by this processing The second large winning opening C20 is configured to be able to determine whether or not to enter the ball (however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining number of shorting times may not be notified).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of right-turning instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. 31 in the second modification example from the present embodiment. The point of change from the present embodiment is step 2600 (v2), the purpose of which is to execute notification control processing for incorporating the above-mentioned stop and cheat as one game characteristic. That is, when it is in the time saving game state (so-called power support state) at step 2052, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 executes right-handed right-handed instruction display control processing to be described later Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of right turn command display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (mod 2) in FIG. 33 according to the second modification example from the present embodiment. First, at step 2602, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and is currently small hit (since it is in the so-called power support state, the small hit of the second main game symbol is mainly) It is determined whether or not it is in the process of fluctuation. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the small hitting symbol according to the variation is the short hitting number of short time short symbols It is a small hit symbol with a relatively small number of time reductions granted after the end of the special game triggered by the game, and taking the first modification example from this embodiment as an example, for example, the number of time reductions pertaining to the short time shorts small hit symbol It is determined whether or not 10 to 30 times, the number of time reductions according to the long and short times small hit symbol is 50 times or 100 times). In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the remaining number of shorting times (same as those reported in step 2554) is the notification mode switching value. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to the denominator of the small hitting probability on the second main game side, and in the present example, 15 or more. The notification mode switching value may be changed to the same value as the second main game hold upper limit number (four in this example) without any problem. In the case of Yes in step 2606, the right-handed command display control means SM26 does not prompt entry into the large winning opening winning selection effect execution command (second large winning opening C20 and eventually V winning opening C22) in step 2608 A command relating to the information to the effect that the effect is to be performed is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2602, step 2604 or step 2606, at step 2610, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 displays a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display (second big winning Set the mouth C20, and eventually the command concerning the information to execute the effect to promote the entry to the V winning opening C22) is sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700 And move on to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Here, the lower part of the same figure is a display image diagram of the special winning opening winning selection effect. As shown in the image view, when the special winning opening winning selection effect is executed, first, a display to urge the player to stop the launch of the game ball, such as "Please stop the launch" is executed. Next, for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the message "Please stop the launch" is displayed, and then "V in the hit small hit game of" If you hit the right, 10 times GET on time saving " When the game ball is made to enter the winning opening C22, a display is performed to notify the player of the number of time-savings scheduled to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit. Therefore, the player selects whether or not to enter the second large winning opening C20 based on the number of time reductions scheduled to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit and the reported remaining number of short times In this way, it is possible to select new game play that allows you to select whether to set the time to the set schedule or to obtain a chance that a relatively large number of times will be newly stopped and displayed. can do.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to perform the large winning opening winning selection effect during the variation of the small hit symbol, but is not limited thereto, the small hit It may be configured to execute in the small hit start demonstration time according to the symbol, and if configured as such, the small hit start demonstration time of the small hit symbol in which the large winning opening winning selection effect can be executed is large. It is desirable to set it longer than the small hit start demonstration time of the small hit design in which the winning opening winning selection effect is not executed. In addition, it may be configured to execute the big winning opening winning selection effect at the small hitting start demonstration time only when the notification mode switching value is not provided and the small hitting start demonstration time is relatively long time. . By configuring in this manner, the player can select whether or not the game ball is to be entered into the second large winning opening C20 (and eventually, the V winning opening C22) during the long-time small hit start demonstration. (If you do not want to enter the ball, the game ball will stop firing). In addition, when so-called reserve pre-reading processing is executed, when there is a reserve that becomes a small hit in the reserve, it is configured to be able to execute the big winning opening winning selection effect in advance at the timing before the fluctuation related to the small hit. It may be configured (that is, it is configured to notify that a small hit will occur in the future and the number of times that it will be set in the future before the reserve that will win the small hit is digested). ).

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the number of prize balls obtainable in the special game triggered by the small hit and the number of time reductions awarded after the special game are When the number of winning balls obtainable in the special game triggered by the small hit is relatively large for each small hit symbol serving as the game trigger, the number of time reductions after the special game is relatively decreased, When the number of winning balls obtainable in the special game triggered by the small hit is relatively small, the number of time savings after the special game may be adjusted to be relatively large. By configuring in such a manner, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second large winning opening C20 when it wins a small hit symbol that a special game in which a small number of time reductions will be awarded will be won. It is not only advantageous to the player to stop the launch), but the payout rate may greatly differ depending on the mode of launch of the game ball in the small hit game (whether to continue the launch or to suspend the launch). By making it possible to configure such that there is no shot mode (the payout rate is significantly increased), the player loses even if the game proceeds in the game ball launch mode that matches the user's preferences. It will not occur and the fairness of the game will be maintained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the special winning opening winning selection effect is not executed even when the small hit is won when the remaining number of short times falls below the notification mode switching value. Although configured as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of a time-saving gaming state (a so-called power support state), it may be configured to always be able to execute the special winning opening winning selection effect. In addition, when it is configured as such, the symbol variation corresponding to the number of time reductions is completed, and the symbol variation related to the second main game side suspension which remains when transitioning from the time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state ( That is, when the player wins a small hit, the player does not execute the large winning opening winning selection effect (that is, encourages the player to enter the V winning opening C22). It may be configured to give priority to one).

Second Embodiment
Here, in the present embodiment, after the special game (including both the special game relating to the main game symbol and the special game relating to the V winning opening C22) is ended depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit or small hit. Although the game state is determined, the method of determining the game state is not limited thereto. Therefore, an example of the configuration that becomes the determination method of the gaming state after the end of the special game different from the present embodiment is taken as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the second embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it should be added that the second embodiment can be applied to any configuration shown in the present embodiment.

  First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 7 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the maximum number of second main game holdings has been changed to one.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the second embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is that the small hit winning probability of the first main game side and the second main game side is changed, and the big hit symbol is for both the first main game side and the second main game side That is, two types of small hit symbols on the second main game side are provided. In the second embodiment, substantially small hits are configured to be won in the second main gaming player's lottery. With this configuration, even if the maximum number of second main game holdings described above with reference to FIG. 31 is one, it is possible to win a small hit in the fluctuation relating to the one holding. In addition, the game state after the big hit ends is different depending on the big hit symbol which becomes the opportunity to win the big hit (whether it becomes time shortening game state or non time shortening game state).

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the present embodiment is step 1760 (second) to step 1764 (second), and the purpose thereof is the end of the special game depending on the type of big hit symbol or small hit symbol pertaining to the special game executed. It is to configure to determine the later gaming state. That is, in step 1760 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and after the end of the special game relating to the jackpot symbol (the first main game side and the second main game side To determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 1760 (second), in step 1762 the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the current stop symbol is the time shift big hit symbol (time reduction after special game end It is a jackpot symbol that will shift to the gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7A · 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1762 (the second), the process proceeds to step 1755 (time-saving gaming state), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1800) (time-saving gaming state does not occur) ).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1760 (the second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b in the step 1764 (the second), and the V that triggered the special game ended. A small hit symbol pertaining to a small hit game that has been executed at the timing of winning is a short shift transition small hit symbol (a transition to a time saving gaming state after a special game pertaining to a V winning in a small hit game pertaining to the small hit symbol It is a small hit symbol which is to be determined, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7AK, 7BK). In the case of Yes in step 1764, the process proceeds to step 1755 (time-saving gaming state), while in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1800) (does not enter time-saving gaming state).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 22 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2218 (second), and the purpose thereof is that, when transitioning to a time saving game state (so-called power support state) after execution of a special game, the time saving game state While (the so-called electric support state) is continuing, it is to execute an effect that is story-wise related to the effect contents displayed when the certain special game is executed. That is, in the case of No at step 2206 or step 2208, at step 2218 (second), the costume display content determination means SM 21 n continuously displays the effect contents of the variation during the special game in the previous special game A battle standby effect mode (this effect image will be described later) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2216. In addition, in 2nd Embodiment, although it comprised so that a decorative symbol might not be displayed at step 2218 (2nd), it is not limited to this, You may comprise so that a decorative symbol may be displayed. In such a case, it is preferable that the display of the decorative symbol is smaller (or less noticeable) than the display of the decorative symbol to be displayed in step 2210.

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 22 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2650 (second), and the purpose is to continuously generate special games when a special game is continuously generated in a short period of time. It is to carry out a story-wise related rendition. That is, after setting the command to sequentially display the number of rounds, the number of winning, and the number of winning game balls in step 2412, in step 2650 (second), the background effect display control means SM23 is executing a special game which will be described later. The effect control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of special game in-progress effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) of FIG. 39 in the second embodiment. First, at step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game relating to the first main game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b in step 2654 and the stop symbol is the first main game time short transition big hit symbol {time shortening gaming state It is a jackpot symbol serving as an opportunity to shift to the support state), and in this example, it is determined whether or not 7A}. In addition, since it shifts to the time shortening gaming state (the so-called power support state) even after the special game ending with the first main game time short transition small hit symbol "7AK", it shifts to step 2656 (first main game small hit The design is "7 AK" only). In the case of Yes in step 2654, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect of notifying a battle entry challenge success effect (informing that transition to a time shortening gaming state will be made as an effect during the special game) The effect image of this effect will be described later. Next, in step 2660, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the battle continuation counter SM23c (the counter to be referred to when determining the effect in the special game through the small hit on the second main game side) to an initial value (counter In this example, 2) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2662. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2654, in other words, the stop symbol is a big hit symbol that does not become an opportunity to shift to the first main game time non-transition symbol {time shortening gaming state (so-called power support state). In the case of {2A in the event of a small hit, transition to the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state) is made, and it becomes Yes in step 2654}, in step 2658, background effect The display control means SM23 executes a battle entry challenge failure effect (an effect notifying that the time shortening gaming state will not be shifted, and the effect image of this effect will be described later) as the effect during the special game. And go to step 2662. Also in the case of No at step 2652, the process proceeds to step 2662.

  Next, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the special game related to the second main game (in particular, the special game via the small hit on the second main game side) It is determined whether or not the game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2662, in step 2664, the background effect display control unit SM23 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the battle continuation counter SM23c. Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the battle continuation counter SM23c and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 2666, in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the small hit symbol that has triggered the transition to the special game is the second main game time short transition small It is determined whether or not a winning symbol {a small hit symbol serving as a transition trigger for the special game and a timing for shifting to a time-saving gaming state (so-called power support state), and in this example, 7BK}. In addition, in order to shift to the time shortening gaming state (the so-called power support state) after the special game end concerning the second main game time short transition big hit symbol "7B", it shifts to step 2670 and the second main game time short non-transition big hit symbol After the end of the special game relating to "2B", it does not shift to the time-saving gaming state (so-called power support state), so it shifts to step 2674. In the case of Yes in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect to notify that the first battle victory effect (transition to the time-saving gaming state will be made as the effect in the special game in step 2670) The effect image of this effect will be described later. Next, in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (2 in this example) to the battle continuation counter SM23c, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2420).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2668, in other words, when the stop symbol is not the second main game time short transition small hit symbol (in this example, the small hit symbol is 2BK), background effect display control in step 2674 The means SM23 executes the first battle non-winning effect (an effect notifying that it will not shift to the time shortening gaming state, the effect image of this effect will be described later) as the effect during the special game. , Shift to the next processing (processing of step 2420). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b at step 2676, and the small hit symbol which became the transition trigger for the special game is the second main game time It is determined whether or not the transition small hit symbol {a small hit symbol serving as a transition trigger for the special game and a trigger for transition to a time shortening gaming state (so-called power support state), and in this example, 7BK}. In addition, in order to shift to the time shortening game state (the so-called power support state) after the special game end concerning the second main game time short transition big hit symbol "7B", it shifts to step 2678, and the second main game time short non-transition big hit symbol After the end of the special game relating to "2B", it does not shift to the time saving gaming state (so-called power support state), so it shifts to step 2682. In the case of Yes in step 2676, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect for notifying that the second battle victory effect (transition to the time-saving gaming state will be made as the effect in the special game in step 2678) The effect image of this effect will be described later. Next, in step 2680, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (2 in this example) to the battle continuation counter SM23c, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2420). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2676, in other words, when the stop symbol is not the second main game time short transition small hit symbol (in this example, the small hit symbol is 2BK), background effect display control in step 2682 The means SM23 executes a second battle not won effect (an effect notifying that it will not shift to the time shortening gaming state, the effect image of this effect will be described later) as the effect during the special game. , Shift to the next processing (processing of step 2420). Also in the case of No at step 2662, the process proceeds to the next process (the process at step 2420).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a game progress flowchart in the second embodiment. The flow of the game shown in the game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Playing progress flow 1>
In the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game start port electric role B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to be opened, so-called non-power support state), the player starts the first main game start Aim the mouth A10 and shoot the game ball (make a so-called left strike) to proceed with the game. Then, if you win the big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, the big hit probability = 1/234), which is performed triggered by entering the ball into the first main game starting slot A10, it will be shown in the figure The first main game jackpot is won ", and after the symbol change of the first main game symbol based on the win is finished (after the big hit symbol of the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed), the predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for 8 rounds is executed (in this example, the first large winning opening C10 is opened, and "15 prize balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" per round) it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <game progression flow 1> ends, the selection rate of 33% (for example, the first main game big hit symbol “7A will be shifted to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game There is a first main gaming jackpot symbol "2A" which will not shift to the time saving gaming state after the end of the special game, and "7A" is selected at "2A" = 1: 2) in the figure. Since the player moves to the “battle mode” shown in FIG. (The second main game start opening electric combination B11d is in a game state where the open state is likely to occur, so-called power support state = time reduction state), the player starts the second main game start It is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 by aiming the mouth electric character B11d and firing the game ball (performing so-called right strike) to advance the game (second main game (second main game) With the entrance to the starting opening B10 , Spruce lottery and symbol variation of the second main game symbols at the second main player side is performed). In addition, when it does not shift to the time shortening gaming state after the special game end concerning the 1st main game big hit symbol, it shifts to the “normal game” which is shown in the figure.

<Game progress flow 3>
After that, the player enters the "battle mode", and the player aims at the second main game start port electric role object B11d and fires the game ball (performs so-called right strike) to advance the game, and the second main game Small hit in the symbol variation of the second main gaming symbol pertaining to entering the starting opening B10 (in the winning lottery pertaining to the second main game, it will be a small hit won to win at 1 / 1.01) Along with winning, one second main game hold occurs during the symbol change (the second main game hold upper limit is one) (when the game ball is continuously fired, the symbol changes during the symbol change) 2 main game hold may occur). In addition, after the symbol variation of the second main gaming symbol based on the winning is finished (after the small hitting symbol of the second main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed), the small hitting game for one round is executed ( In this example, the second big winning opening C20 is opened, but if configured as in the present embodiment, if the gaming ball is continuously fired to aim at the second big winning opening C20, V It becomes almost definite to enter the winning opening C22). Then, after the small hit game is over, the predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, 4 rounds or 15 rounds will be distributed (due to entering the ball into the C prize winning slot C22), but typically it is Such a difference in distribution is generated by setting the maximum number of rounds determined in accordance with the type of the second main game symbol small hit symbol, and the maximum number of rounds is a small hit game The second large winning opening C20 pertaining to the first round, and the total number of rounds of the number of rounds opening the first large winning opening C10 pertaining to the special game to be executed triggered by a small hit) A big hit (a small hit game to a special game triggered by the small hit game is called a big hit) is executed (in this example, in the special game triggered by a small hit, the first big winning opening C10 is Be open If you can earn "15 prize balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" per round, and the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, about 500 including the game balls obtained in the small hit game If the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, approximately 1900 pieces of game balls, including those obtained in the small hit game, remain as the player's balls).

<Game progress flow 4>
When the special game executed in the above <game progression flow 3> ends, the second main game small hit symbol “which will shift to the time reduction gaming state after the special game ends, for example, at a selection rate of 33% "7 BK" and the second main game small hit symbol "2 BK" which will not shift to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game, and is selected at 7 BK: 2 BK = 1: 2), < It becomes the same effect as game progress flow 3> (as symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol is executed based on the remaining second main game hold, one new second main game hold occurs) . On the other hand, if it does not shift to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game, the symbol variation of the second main gaming symbol is executed based on the remaining second main gaming suspension (as it is a so-called non-power support state) , The second main game hold does not occur anew, small hit in the said symbol variation (in the winning lottery pertaining to the second main game, it will be almost a small hit elected to win in 1 / 1.01) When the player wins, as described above, "small hit-> entry into V winning opening C22-> special game" is executed. Then, after the special game is over, the gaming state is similarly determined based on the small hit symbol, and when the gaming state is the time shortening gaming state, it is again the same as <gaming progress flow 3>. It becomes an action (as symbol variation of the 2nd main game symbol concerning a ball entering to the 2nd main game starting slot B10 is executed, and one 2nd main game reservation newly arises). On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state, there is no second main gaming hold, and therefore, the transition to “normal game” shown in the drawing is made. In this way, in the "battle mode", it is almost guaranteed that "small hit-> entry to the V winning opening C22-> special game" will be executed twice when the rushed into, and after two special games are over Non-time reduction gaming state and second main game hold that “small hit → entry to the V winning opening C 22 → special game” is executed twice again when transitioning to the time reduction gaming state in any of The state advantageous to the player is a playability looping until it becomes null. In addition, the number of times that the execution of "small hit → entering V in the V winning opening C 22 → special game" is almost fixed is the number of symbol changes related to entering the second main game start slot B10 and the symbol change Although it is configured to be twice with one second main game hold that occurred during the period, the present invention is not limited to this, with the second main game hold upper limit number being three, the "small hit → V prize Entry to the mouth C22 → execution of the special game may be made almost four times, and it may be a playability in which a state advantageous to the player is looped in one set of four occurrences of special games (in that case, Even if, for example, the entry ratio to "battle mode" in <game progression flow 2> is 50%, and the reentry ratio to "battle mode" in <game progression flow 4> is 25%. Good).

<Irregular game progress flow>
In <game progression flow 1>, a small hit lottery (in this example, a small hit probability of 1/1024 in this example) is also performed on the occasion of entering the ball into the first main game start opening A10. If the player wins the small hit lottery, it becomes the “first main game small hit winning” shown in the figure, and the small hit game for one round is executed (for example, also in the small hit game in this case, the first (2) open the big winning opening C20) and, after the small hitting game ends, the special game for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (due to entering the ball to the V winning opening C22) is executed It is also possible to configure. In addition, when the special game ends, it is possible to be configured to shift to the "battle mode" shown in the drawing. Here, the handling in the case of winning the small hit lottery on the first main game side is not particularly limited, but in the case of being configured to be elected with an extremely low probability as in this example, If the game ball is continuously fired at the second big winning opening C20 at the time of execution, it is preferable that the entry into the V winning opening C22 be substantially definite. In addition, after the small hitting game ends, it is preferable that the special game for the set maximum number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) is executed.

  Next, FIG. 42 is an image diagram according to the special game in-process and the like in the second embodiment. This figure exemplifies the flow of a series of special games concerning whether or not to enter the "battle mode" described in detail in FIG. 41, and a series of games of effects executed during the "battle mode". . First, in the special game executed according to <playing progress flow 1>, when it is planned to shift to the time shortening gaming state after the special game is over (the jackpot symbol of the first main game side was "7A" In the case of (a), a “battle rush challenge success effect” (for example, an effect in which an enemy who finds a treasure box and an enemy that will fight in a battle effect appears from the treasure box) is executed as a special game effect. After the end of the special game, it will shift to a time saving game state (a so-called electric support state). That is, in the special game executed in accordance with <game progression flow 1>, the "battle rush challenge success effect" is an effect of giving a notice to the player that the time saving gaming state is to be transitioned after the special game is over. It becomes the contents. On the other hand, when it is not planned to shift to the time reduction gaming state after the special game is over (when the jackpot symbol on the first main game side is "2A"), "Battle rush challenge failure" as an effect during the special game "The effect (for example, although the hero discovers a treasure box, an effect in which a sheet of paper written" Ska "appears from the treasure box) is executed, and after the special game is over, the time-saving gaming state is not transitioned. In other words, "a battle rush challenge failure effect" is an effect of giving a notice to the player that the game does not shift to the time saving game state after the special game is over during the special game executed according to <playing progress flow 1>. It becomes the contents.

  Next, when transitioning to the time shortening gaming state (so-called power support state) according to <game progression flow 2>, the second main gaming symbol fluctuates triggered by entering the second main game start port B10. There is one second main game hold during the symbol change. In this case, during the symbol change, "Battle standby effect" (informing that the occurrence of the special game through the small hit game is committed), for example, the effect that the main character and the enemy meet Will be executed.

  Next, when a special game occurs via a small hit game according to <game progression flow 3>, the small hit symbol is a second main game time short transition small hit pattern {this special game becomes a transition trigger and the time is shortened If it is a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to the gaming state (so-called power support state), and in this example is 7 BK}, during the execution of the special game, “the first battle victory effect” (the figure of the main character is After being projected, an effect in which the main character attacks and destroys the enemy is executed, and after the end of the special game, the game is shifted to a time-saving gaming state (a so-called electric support state). That is, the "first battle victory effect" is an effect of giving a notice to the player that the time saving gaming state is to be transitioned after the special game is over during the special game executed in accordance with <game proceeding flow 3>. It becomes the contents. On the other hand, if a special game occurs via a small hit game according to <game progress flow 3>, and the small hit symbol is not the second main game time transition short hit symbol, during the execution of the special game, "First battle not victorious effect" (effect that the image of the enemy is shown and the enemy tries to attack the main character) is executed, and after the special game is over, it does not shift to the time saving game state (the so-called power support state) It becomes. That is, in the special game executed in accordance with <game progress flow 3>, the "first battle not won effect" announces to the player that it does not shift to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game. It becomes the contents of the effect.

  Here, when "the first battle victory effect" is executed, then during the symbol change of the second main game symbol after that, the "Battle standby effect" described above (the occurrence of the special game via the small hit game is This is an effect of informing that the state is affirmed state, and, for example, the effect will be returned to the effect of the main character and the enemy meeting with each other. The type of enemy executed at this timing may be configured to be different from the type of enemy displayed in the “first battle victory effect”. On the other hand, if the "first battle not won effect" is executed, then during the symbol change of the second main gaming symbol after that, there is a further "battle standby effect" (the occurrence of the special game via the small hit game is It is an effect of informing that it is a state of commitment, and an effect of informing that the second main game hold is exhausted, for example, the enemy displayed in the "first battle not won effect" attack the main character Effect is performed.

  Next, when it does not shift to time shortening game state (so-called power support state) according to <game progress flow 4> (ie, the symbol fluctuation of the 2nd main game symbol is based on the remaining 2nd main game reservation) When a special game occurs via a small hit game according to <game progress flow 3> in the case where the second main game hold does not occur and is newly executed, and the small hit symbol shifts to the second main game time Small hit symbol {If it is 7 BK in this example, it is a small hit symbol that becomes a transition trigger for the special game and triggers a transition to the time-saving gaming state (so-called power support state), the special game is being executed. "The second battle victory effect" (It is an effect that the main character prevents the attack of the enemy, then the main character performs the attack of attacking the enemy and defeating the enemy is executed) is executed, the time is shortened after the special game is over Gaming state So that the transition to electric support state). That is, "the second battle victory effect" is effect contents for giving a notice to the player that the time saving gaming state is to be transitioned to after the end of the special game, similarly to "the first battle victory effect". , The contents of the production are those related in story to the "first battle not won production". In addition, when it does not shift to the time shortening game state (the so-called power support state) according to <game progress flow 4> (ie, based on the 2nd main game reservation which is remaining, the design fluctuation of 2nd main game symbol execution is executed And when the second main game hold does not occur), if a special game occurs via a small hit game according to <game progress flow 3>, and the small hit symbol is a second main game time transition small If it is not a hit pattern, during the execution of the special game, the “second battle not won effect” (effect that the main character is destroyed by the enemy) is executed, and after the end of the special game, the time-saving gaming state (so-called It will not shift to the support state). That is, as with the "first battle not won effect", the "second battle not won effect" is effect contents for giving a notice to the player that it will not shift to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game. Although there is, the contents of the production are those related in story to the "first battle not won production". In addition, when "the second battle victory effect" is executed, during the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol after that, the "Battle standby effect" mentioned above (the occurrence of the special game via the small hit game is affirmation It is an effect of informing that it is in a state of being carried out, and, for example, an effect of returning to the effect that the main character and the enemy meet with each other is returned. The type of enemy executed at this timing may be configured to be different from the type of enemy displayed in the “second battle victory effect”. On the other hand, when the "second battle not won effect" is executed, in order to return to the normal game, it will be switched to the effect for the normal gaming state.

  By configuring in this manner, in the second embodiment, a seamless effect in which a state advantageous to the player continues unless the main character is defeated by the enemy is during the variation of the main game symbol and during the small hit game and the special It becomes executable over the game. That is, it starts from "battle rush challenge success production" (production corresponding to the execution of the special game generated on the first main game side), and "battle standby presentation" (through the small hit game after the execution of the special game) Effect corresponding to the occurrence of the new special game) → "first battle victory effect" (effect corresponding to the new special game being executed) → "battle standby effect" or "battle standby" "Effect" (effect corresponding to the occurrence of a new special game via a small hit game after completion of the special game) → "First battle not won effect" (corresponds during the new special game Production) → "Battle standby production" (production corresponding to the occurrence of a further special game via a small hit game after the end of the execution of the new special game) → "second battle victory effect" (the further special While playing a game As long as the response was directed) → seamless production to be a "battle waiting game effect" continues to occur, it is the it is possible to be advantageous state to notify the subject that has continued for the player.

  In the second embodiment, since the upper limit of the number held on the second main game side is one, it has become a playability that loops in one set of two occurrences of special games, but the second main game side There is no problem even if you change the upper limit number of holdings, for example, with the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side being three, it will be a playability that loops in one set of four occurrences of special games, and special effects during special games May be provided in four stages (first to fourth battle victory effects and first to fourth battle non-winning effects). When configured as such, as a production example of each battle production, the first battle victory production, the production where the figure of the main character is projected, the production where the first battle non-winning production, the appearance of the enemy, the second battle The effect that the main character attacks, the effect that the main character attacks, the effect that the enemy attacks the second generation, the effect that the main character defends the attack of the enemy, the third battle non-earning effect, the main character However, the fourth battle victory effect may be the effect that the main character stands up, and the fourth battle non-winning effect may be the effect that the main character loses without being able to rise.

  In addition, while staying in the "Battle mode", winning a big hit with a small hit on the second main game side is a flow to increase the main balls, but during the "Battle mode" stay If you win the jackpot of the second main game side without going through the small hit, even if configured to perform the effect of a different aspect (specific aspect) from the case of winning the big hit triggered by the small hit elected For example, when "7 B" is won, for example, effects such as "the main character gives out a special move" may be executed. Incidentally, it is preferable to execute the effect of the specific aspect when it is highly profitable for the player (in this example, when the jackpot according to “7B” is won), and the jackpot when it is the maximum profit (for example, round) It is more preferable to execute the game with the largest number, and the big hit (transition to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends). Also, even when a small hit is taken as a chance to win a big hit, it may be configured to be able to execute the effect of the specific aspect, for example, the maximum number of rounds of the second main game In this example, the big hit (15R) rounds are executed (of the small hit symbols 7BK, the maximum number of rounds to be executed in the big hit triggered by the small hit win is 15R. The small hit symbol for which the number of rounds is 4R is 7BK-2, and in this example, when the player wins a big hit with 7BK-1 as a trigger, the effect of the specific aspect may be executed. In such a configuration, after the big hit when the rounds of the maximum number of rounds are executed, it is configured to shift to the time-saving gaming state (not only the winning game ball for big hit but also the gaming state after the big hit end It is desirable to configure the player to be advantageous).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the small hit winning probability relating to the second main game is made higher than in the present embodiment (probability of winning almost every variation), The occurrence of one special game is almost definite per one hold pertaining to the second main game. Therefore, when the holding upper limit concerning the 2nd main game is one, when it shifts to the time shortening gaming state, the 1 holding concerning the 2nd main game occurs → the symbol fluctuation which relates to the holding which occurred In the series of game progression that the symbol change that will be almost small hit is executed → a new main hold on the second main game occurs in the executed symbol change, from then on, two special games Occurrence is almost definite. Therefore, even if it has shifted to the non-time shortening gaming state after the execution of the first special game, if it shifts to the time shortening gaming state after the execution of the second special game, the special game 2 is further added. Since the occurrence of the batch becomes almost definite, as long as transitioning to the time-saving gaming state continues after execution of any of the two special games, the game is awarded with balls by the execution of the special game endlessly Of course, this example is just an example, and it is possible to change the ratio of transition to the time saving gaming state after the execution of the upper limit on the number of the second main game and the special game. , Can achieve various ball specifications)).

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, by transitioning to the time shortening gaming state (so-called power support state) after the special game execution pertaining to the first main gaming symbol, “to small hit → V winning opening C22 It is configured that it is substantially assured that the game advantageous to the player is executed twice, that is, “enter a ball → special game”, and during the advantageous game for the player, time reduction is performed again after the special game is over. If it is possible to shift the state, creating a novel game characteristic that the game advantageous to the player loops in one set of two, such as it is almost guaranteed that the game advantageous to the player is executed twice twice It will be possible. In addition, by performing a seamless effect during a period in which the player continues to be awarded balls, it is possible to feel as if the game ball is constantly increasing during the period, and the interest of the game is enhanced. .

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, based on the stopped big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped, the game after the end of the special game executed thereafter Although the system is configured to determine the state, the method of determining the game state after the end of the special game is not limited thereto. Therefore, an example of the configuration that becomes the determination method of the gaming state after the end of the special game different from the second embodiment is set as a first modification example from the second embodiment, and the detailed description of only the changes from the second embodiment Do. Furthermore, since the first modification from the second embodiment is also a modification based on the second embodiment, any configuration shown in the second embodiment is the first modification from the second embodiment. It should be added that it is applicable.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, a first main game time reduction counter MP52c-1 for managing time reductions related to the first main game, and a second for managing time reductions related to the second main game It has a main gaming time short-time counter MP52c-2.

  First, FIG. 43 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is that three small hit symbols are provided on the second main game side. By configuring in this way, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the big hit symbol based on the type of stopped big hit symbol or small hit symbol and the gaming state at the time of the big hit symbol or small hit symbol stop. Alternatively, it can be configured to determine the gaming state after the end of the special game according to the small hit symbol (details will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 12 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is from step 1511 (second change 1) to step 1520 (second change 1), that is, in step 1511 (second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 The first main gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the stopped main gaming symbol is the first main gaming symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1511 (second change 1), in step 1512 (second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first main game time reduction counter MP52c-1 and the counter value is less than 0. It is determined whether it is a large value. If Yes in step 1512 (second change 1), in step 1514 (second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the first main game time counter MP52c-1. Next, in step 1516 (second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first main game time counter short-time counter MP52c-1 to determine whether the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1516 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1521 (second modification 1).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1511 (the second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the second main game time counter MP52c-2 in the step 1518 (the second change 1), and the counter value is It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1518 (second change 1), in step 1519 (second change 1), the specified game control means MP50 subtracts one from the counter value of the second main game time counter MP52c-2. Next, in step 1520 (second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the second main game time counter MP52c-2 to determine whether the counter value is zero or not. If Yes in step 1520 (second change 1), the process proceeds to step 1521 (second change 1).

  Next, in step 1521 (second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets (zero clears) the first main game time counter MP52c-1. Next, in step 1522 (second change 1), the specified game control means MP50 resets (zero clears) the second main game time counter MP52c-2 and shifts to step 1508. If No in step 1512 (second change 1), step 1516 (second change 1), step 1518 (second change 1) or step 1520 (second change 1), the next process (step 1600) Move to Thus, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when either the counter value of the first main game time counter MP52c-1 or the counter value of the second main game time counter MP52c-2 is 0. The time saving game state is configured to end. Further, by configuring in this way, when it is desired to end the time shortening gaming state by changing the second main gaming side by 1 during the time shortening gaming state, when the first main gaming side is unintentionally fluctuated Also, the time saving game state can be configured not to end, and a user-friendly game machine can be provided. In addition, if the second main gaming side is configured to be able to execute a plurality of changes during the time-saving gaming state, a skilled player visually recognizes the second main gaming symbol display portion B21g and confirms the small hit symbol, If it is a small hit symbol that does not become time reduction game state after the special game ending with the small hit game pertaining to the small hit symbol, the launch of the game ball for the second big winning opening C20 is canceled, the time The second main game time counter MP52c-because there is a risk of aiming to win the small hit symbol that will be time reduction gaming state after the special game ending with the small hit game after the next change in the reduced gaming state The initial value of 2 is 1 time (preventing such gaming methods). In addition, the time shortening gaming state may be configured to end when the total number of the number of fluctuations relating to the first main game and the number of fluctuations relating to the second main game reaches a predetermined value.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 7 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The points of change from the second embodiment are steps 1615 (second change 1) and step 1616 (second change 1) to step 1628 (second change 1), and the purpose is during the execution of the small hit game When the player enters the V winning opening C22 in, the execution start timing of the special game based on the entering the ball is to be the time of entering the "specific entry". That is, at step 1615 (the second modification 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether the auxiliary game start opening entering ball standby flag is off or not. Determine In the case of Yes in step 1615 (second change 1), the process proceeds to step 1602, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1624 (second change 1).

  Also, after turning off the specific game flag at step 1604, the special game control means MP30 resets (zero clears) the first main game time counter MP52c-1 at step 1616 (second change 1). Next, in step 1618 (second change 1), the special game control means MP30 resets (zero clears) the second main game time short count counter MP52c-2. Next, in step 1620 (second change 1), the special game control means MP30 is an auxiliary game start opening ball entry instruction command (a command instructing the auxiliary game start opening H10 to enter the game ball, for example, “A big hit starts when the player enters the auxiliary game starting opening” is displayed (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Next, in step 1622 (the second modification 1), the special game control means MP30 turns on the auxiliary game start port entering ball waiting flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, step 1624 Shift to (2nd variant 1).

  Next, in step 1624 (the second modification 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1624 (the second change 1), in step 1626 (the second change 1), the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Turn off the waiting flag. Next, in step 1628 (the second modification 1), the special game control means MP30 has a command to start the auxiliary game start slot ball (the game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10, and the special game is started This command is a command for notifying, for example, "display big hit is started" is set (sent to sub sub control unit SS side in display command transmission control processing of step 2700), and it proceeds to step 1612 Do. In the case of No at step 1624 (the second variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1800).

  By configuring in this way, the execution start timing of the special game can be at the time of entering the "specific entry slot" (in this example, the auxiliary game start port H10), and in particular, the execution of the small hit game The start timing of the special game based on the entering the ball when entering the V winning opening C22 in can be made the time of entering the "specified entry" {Of course, via a small hit game The start timing of the special game (for example, after the stop display of the jackpot symbol) that has occurred without can be taken as the time of entering the "specific entry slot"}. In this example, the “specific entry slot” is the auxiliary game start port H10, and the auxiliary game entry port H10 is an entrance trigger for changing the assistance game symbol and an entrance trigger for starting the special game execution. Although it shares two roles with the mouth, it is not limited to this, and the auxiliary game start port H10 has only the role of the entrance as a trigger for fluctuation of the auxiliary game pattern, and the special game You may provide separately for the ball entrance which becomes an execution start opportunity of (4) separately. In addition, the game ball entered into the "specified entry" may be configured to enter the variable winning opening that is opened at the time of execution of the special game as it is (in this case, the so-called "specific entry of through type" When the variable winning opening is provided downstream of the “mouth” and enters the “specified entry hole”, the variable winning opening is opened immediately without providing a so-called big hit start demonstration time).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 17 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 1766 (second change 1) to 1774 (second change 1), that is, after the end of the special game pertaining to the V winning opening C22 in step 1760 (second) If there is, in step 1766 (the second modification 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the small hit symbol that triggered the entry to the V prize winning opening C22 is time-short It is not a transition small hit symbol (it is a small hit symbol that will shift to the time shortening gaming state after the special game related to the V winning in the small hit game pertaining to the small hit symbol, 7BK in this example) It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1766 (the second change 1), in step 1768 (the second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and enters the ball for the V winning opening C22. It is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning which became the trigger is the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1768 (the second change 1), in step 1770 (the second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and enters the ball for the V winning opening C22. The small hit symbol that was triggered by the time transition to a short transition small hit symbol (When the small hit was in the time-saving gaming state at the time of the small hit, the V winning in the small hit game pertaining to the small hit symbol concerned It is a small hit symbol that will shift to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game, and it is determined whether or not it is 5BK in this example. If Yes in step 1770 (second change 1), the process proceeds to step 1772 (second change 1). Also in the case of Yes in step 1762 (second) or in the case of No in step 1766 (second variation), the process proceeds to step 1772 (second variation 1).

  Next, at step 1772 (second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets a first main game time counter MP52c-1 a predetermined number of times (in this example, 99 times). Next, in step 1774 (the second modification 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets the second main game time counter MP52c-2 a predetermined number of times (one in this example), and proceeds to step 1756 . The first main game time counter MP52c-1 is set a predetermined number of times (in this example, 99 times), and the second main game time counter MP52c-2 is set a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) The sum with is 100 times. In the case of No in step 1768 (the second modification 1) or step 1770 (the second modification 1), the process proceeds to the next processing (the processing in step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of right-turning instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. 22 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2064 (second change 1) to step 2074 (second change 1), and the purpose thereof is to enter the V winning opening C22 particularly during the execution of the small hit game In this case, the player is notified that the game ball should be fired by aiming at the “specific entry slot” (in this example, the auxiliary game start port H10). That is, when the special game is not being executed at step 2058, at step 2064 (the second change 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the flag area of the main information temporary storage means SM11b and waits for the special game start It is determined whether the medium flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2064 (the second change 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 2066 (the second change 1), and starts the auxiliary game from the main side It is determined whether or not the ball entry instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2066 (second change 1), in step 2068 (second change 1), the right-handed command display control means SM26 is waiting for the start of the special game in the flag area of the main information temporary storage means SM11b. Turn on the flag. Next, in step 2070 (second modification 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub sub control unit SS Transmitted to the side, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). In the first modification from the second embodiment, the first right-handed instruction display plays a role of promoting the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 to start the special game. There is. In addition, the said production mode is not limited to this, It is good also as a 2nd right-handed instruction display, separately from a right-handed instruction display, for exclusive effects (For example, "in the auxiliary game starting opening H10 to effect display apparatus SG You may provide an effect of displaying a big hit when you enter the ball) (that is, start timing of the special game based on the entering the ball when entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hitting game) Since it is a special game characteristic not found in the conventional gaming machine that the time of entering the "specific entry" is entered, it is possible to give the player a clear instruction notification like the special effect. May be suitable). In the case of No at step 2066 (the second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 2062.

  In the case of No at step 2064 (second change 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b at step 2072 (second change 1), and the assistance from the main side It is determined whether or not a game start slot entry instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2072 (second change 1), in step 2074 (second change 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 is waiting for the start of the special game in the flag area of the main information temporary storage means SM11b. The flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). Also in the case of No in step 2072 (the second variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the gaming state at the time of big hit or small hit winning (time shortening gaming state or non-time shortening gaming state ) Can make the gaming state (time transition rate) after the end of the special game pertaining to the big hit or small hit different, and the number of times the second main game symbol can be varied in the time shortening gaming state is once Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of unfair gaming methods such as a gaming method in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the V winning opening C22 until winning a small win symbol of high profit, and the first main gaming side unintentionally fluctuates Even if it has been done, the time saving gaming state can be configured not to end, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, after the jackpot (stop of the jackpot symbol or entering the V winning opening C22 as a trigger, the condition device operation flag is turned on), the special By configuring the special game to start by causing the game ball to enter the ball entrance (in this example, the auxiliary game start port H10) that becomes a transition opportunity to the game, the player is in continuous play (game Of the game ball can be stopped at the timing when the condition device operation flag is turned on, even during a period of high profit for the player), reducing fatigue caused by continuing the game for a long time It can be a user friendly gaming machine (for example, the game can be interrupted to take a rest break).

Third Embodiment
In the embodiment shown so far, when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state, the second main game can be caused to hold until the second main game reaches the holding upper limit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when shifting to the time-saving gaming state, the expected number relating to the number of held secondary game players that can be caused may change. In such a configuration, it is possible to construct new playability that can not be achieved by the embodiments shown so far. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is taken as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the third embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it should be added that the third embodiment can be applied to any configuration shown in the present embodiment {but only In the following exemplification in the third embodiment, in order to realize the special game characteristics, it is assumed that the fluctuation fixed time relating to the main game pattern is uniform (for example, 0.2 seconds) in a short time. }.

  In the third embodiment, limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the main gaming symbol at the limited frequency and the variation mode related to the main gaming symbol at the limited frequency are determined. A table for limiting frequency variation mode determination made up of a plurality of tables configured to be determined according to the gaming state and the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol after the special game is ended. And a limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN 52 b for temporarily storing information related to the limited frequency (flag on / off, etc.).

  First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 7 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is steps 1201 (third) and steps 1247-1 (third) to steps 1247-4 (third), that is, in step 1201 (third), auxiliary gaming symbol control Means MP11-H refers to the flag area of auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and determines whether or not the electric-powered-standby-waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1201 (third), the process proceeds to step 1202, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1247-3 (third).

  Next, after closing the motorized prize in step 1244, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H controls the standby time timer MP11t-H2 for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) in step 1247-1 (third) Set) and start. Next, in step 1247-2 (third), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns on the electric bonus waiting flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the step Shift to 1247-3 (third).

  Next, in step 1247-3 (third), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the waiting time timer MP11t-H2 and determines whether the timer value is zero or not. In the case of Yes in step 1247-3 (third), in step 1247-4 (third), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H is electrically powered within the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. The feature waiting flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1246. In the case of No at step 1247-3 (third), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300). In this way, the variation time determined in the time-saving gaming state is configured by being able to open and close again after the elapse of the standby time (5 seconds in this example) after the second main game start opening motorized combination B11d is closed. While being able to stabilize the number which can cause the 2nd main game reservation inside, in the production which relates to the effect that the reservation has occurred, the number of opening of the 2nd main game start mouth electric part B11d in time shortening game state It is possible to secure the time to execute the effect relating to whether or not the second main game start opening electric combination B11d opens in the effect, time shortening gaming state, and the like. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol in the time reduction gaming state may be a long time (for example, 5 seconds), the same effect as the standby time may be realized. However, if the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol is long (for example, 5 seconds), the variation related to the auxiliary gaming symbol which has begun to be varied during the special game (particularly, variation in the non-time shortening gaming state) When straddling the game end timing, variation occurs in the timing at which the variation related to the next auxiliary gaming symbol of the variation starts, thereby causing variation in the second main game reserve number that can be caused during the time saving gaming state It is easy to occur. Thus, for example, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is as short as possible, and the special game end timing and the variation display start timing of the auxiliary game symbol are combined, and then the standby time (second main game start opening electric role object B11d It is effective to use a fixed period (which does not occur unless it is opened) to stabilize the number that can cause the second main game hold within the fluctuation time determined in the time-saving gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 7 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1402 (third), with respect to the first main gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A, the holding and digesting control means MJ 31 determines whether or not there is a holding of the first main gaming symbol. Check. In the case of Yes in step 1402 (third), in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600) . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1402 (third), in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and the next process (the process of step 1600). Transition. Thus, in the third embodiment, the first main game hold is prioritized over the second main game hold (but not limited to this, but rather than the first main game hold) The second main game hold may be configured to be prioritized and digested).

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) or (2) of FIG. 49 in the third embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 1449 (third), step 1550 and step 1449-1 (third) to step 1449-12 (third), that is, at step 1410, the main gaming symbol is stopped. After the symbol is determined, in step 1449 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52 b and sets the limited frequency flag (limited frequency A flag, limited frequency B It is determined whether any one of the flag and the limit frequency C flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1449 (third), in step 1550 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 executes limited frequency variation mode determination processing described later, and shifts to step 1450.

  Also, after turning on the condition device activation flag at step 1446, at step 1449-1 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the limited frequency within the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on the B flag. Next, in step 1449-2 (third), the limited frequency change mode determination means MN 52 sets the middle profit provision command (the change time relating to the second main game symbol after the big hit or Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM a command for notifying that the profit ratio is medium (by the control command transmission processing of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side To be sent) and go to step 1449-11 (third).

  On the other hand, after turning on the small hit flag in step 1448, in step 1449-3 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The stop symbol is a high profit grant small hit symbol (a small hit symbol in which the fluctuation time relating to the second main gaming symbol after the small hit game ends is a high profit rate for the player, and in this example, 7 BK) It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 1449-3 (third), in step 1449-4 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the limited frequency C flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on. Next, in step 1449-5 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 sets the high profit giving command (the variation time relating to the second main game symbol after the big hit or A command for notifying that the profit margin is high is set in a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999) Step 1449-11 (third).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1449-3 (third), in step 1449-6 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 is the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The stop symbol is a medium winning small hit symbol (a small hit symbol in which the fluctuation time relating to the second main gaming symbol after the small hit game ends is a medium profit rate for the player, and in this example, , 4BK). In the case of Yes in step 1449-6 (third), in step 1449-7 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on. Next, in step 1449-8 (third), the limited frequency change mode determination means MN 52 sets the middle profit provision command (the change time relating to the second main game symbol after the big hit or Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM a command for notifying that the profit ratio is medium (by the control command transmission processing of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side To be sent) and go to step 1449-11 (third).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1449-6 (third), in step 1449-9 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 limits the frequency within the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on the A flag. Next, in step 1449-10 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 sets the low profit giving command (the variation time relating to the second main game symbol after the big hit or A command for notifying that the profit margin is low is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999) Step 1449-11 (third).

  Next, in step 1449-11 (third), the limited frequency change mode determining means MN52 sets an initial value (10 times in this example) to the first main game limited frequency counter MN52c-1. Next, in step 1449-12 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 sets an initial value (one time in this example) to the second main game limited frequency counter MN 52c-2 and proceeds to step 1500 Transition.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the limited frequency change mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 (third) of FIG. 50 in the third embodiment. First, at step 1552, the limited frequency change mode determination means MN 52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and determines whether the limit frequency A flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency table A (limited frequency change mode determining table MN52ta) to determine the changing mode (change time) regarding the main game pattern And go to step 1562. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, in step 1556, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b and determines whether the limited frequency B flag is on. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1556, in step 1558, limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to limited frequency table B (limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta) to determine the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game pattern And go to step 1562. On the other hand, if No in step 1556, in other words if the limitation frequency C flag is on, in step 1560, the limitation frequency variation mode determination means MN52 sets the limitation frequency table C (limit frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta). By referring to it, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process shifts to step 1562.

  Next, at step 1562, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and determines whether the change is a change relating to the first main game. In the case of Yes in step 1562, in step 1564, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the first main game limited frequency counter MN 52 c-1. Next, in step 1566, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the first main game limited frequency counter MN 52c-1 and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1566, in step 1570, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 sets a limited frequency flag (limited frequency A flag, limited frequency B flag, limited frequency) within the flag area of limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b. C flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1562, in step 1568, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the second main game limited frequency counter MN 52c-2 and shifts to step 1570 (second main game Since the initial value set in the limited frequency counter MN52c-2 is 1, the counter value after subtraction is not referred to). In the case of No at step 1566, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450).

  Next, FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the third embodiment. The content of this table is a configuration in which a plurality of big hit symbols are provided in the first modification of the second embodiment. Further, with respect to the table surrounded by the dotted line of the main gaming table 3, in the non-time shortening gaming state, it is difficult to execute the fluctuation relating to the second main gaming, and in the time shortening gaming state, the first main gaming side, the first Since the limited frequency table is referred to by both of the two main game players, it is not substantially referred to.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a block diagram of a limited frequency table in the third embodiment. The figure is composed of a limit frequency table A, a limit frequency table B and a limit frequency table C. The variation mode is uniquely determined in all the tables, and the difference between the limited frequency tables is the content of the second main game side. The fluctuation time according to the second main game side is "when referring to limited frequency table C> when referred to limited frequency table B> when referred to limited frequency table A", and in the time shortening gaming state where it is only 1 fluctuation. The expected value which can cause the second main game hold is different due to the fluctuation of the second main game side. In the third embodiment, the variation related to the second main game holding is won almost at a small hit, and the special game related to the V prize is to be executed triggered by the small hit, so the second main game holding number Directly connected to the player's profit. Therefore, the profit rate of the player is also "when referring to the limited frequency table C> when referring to the limited frequency table B> when referring to the limited frequency table A". In addition, since the waiting time (5 seconds) concerning the 2nd main game start opening electric role thing B11d is provided as for the number which can make the 2nd main game hold mentioned above, when the limited frequency table A is referred There are almost no occurrences, and the number of times of reference to the limited frequency table B is approximately 1 to 2, and the number of times of reference to the limited frequency table C is approximately 4 to 5.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the third embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is step 1776 (third) and step 1777 (third), that is, in step 1776 (third), the specified game control means MP50 is a first main game time reduction counter MP52c. Set a predetermined number of times (10 times) to -1. Next, in step 1777 (third), the specified game control means MP50 sets a second main game time short counter MP52c-2 a predetermined number of times (once), and proceeds to step 1756. As described above, in the third embodiment, as in the first modification from the second embodiment, either the first main game time counter MP52c-1 or the second main game time counter MP52c-2 is used. The time saving game state is configured to end when the value becomes 0. In addition, the number of times of time saving and the number of times of limitation are the same.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 22 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is steps 2120 (third) and 2122 (third), that is, after temporarily storing the hold information in step 2106, in step 2120 (third), the drawing hold information The display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the new hold is a hold on the second main game side. If Yes in step 2120 (third), in step 2122 (third), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for executing the second main game hold generation effect (display command transmission control of step 2700 In the process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side, and the process shifts to step 2118. Here, the lower right of the figure is a second main game hold occurrence image diagram. As described above, since the generated second main game holding number is directly linked to the player's profit, an effect of notifying that a high profit event has occurred for the player is executed.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 22 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the step 2500 (third), that is, after the big hit start display is executed in the step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 will be described later in the step 2500 (third). The special game effect display control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game in-progress effect display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 (third) of FIG. 45 in the third embodiment. First, at step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a high profit giving command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect of notifying that the player will be in high profit after the end of the special game (for example, "Battle effect execution → victory by special move") Are set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process shifts to step 2506. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2502, the processing shifts to step 2506.

  Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the middle profit giving command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 performs an effect (for example, "Battle effect execution → victory in punch") notifying that the player will be in middle profit after the special game is over A command to be executed is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 2510. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2506, the process proceeds to step 2510.

  Next, in step 2510, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a low profit giving command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 executes an effect (for example, "Battle effect execution → defeat") notifying that the player is in low profit after the special game is over The command is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2420). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2510, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2420).

  By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment is configured to refer to the limited frequency table after the end of the special game, and the big hit symbol or small hit stopped immediately before the execution of the special game. It is comprised so that the limited frequency table to refer based on a symbol may be determined. In addition, the fluctuation related to the second main game hold is elected almost small hit, and by entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game is elected a special game (the change related to the second main game hold is special It is configured to be directly connected to the game, and the variable number of times related to the second main game in the time-saving gaming state is only 1 fluctuation, and thus is configured as such, the fluctuation time of only the fluctuation 1 However, the second hold occurrence possibility number will be influenced, and the player will pay attention to 1 fluctuation after the end of the special game.

  In the third embodiment, it is configured to suggest the limited frequency table (or the fluctuation time relating to the second main game symbol) to be referred to after the end of the special game in the special game effect, but The present invention is not limited to this example, and it may be configured to notify the result of the profit mode by the effect concerning the fluctuation after the end of the special game without notifying the profit mode definitely in the special game effect. , It may be configured to execute both the special game production and the special game production (for example, during the special game, "Battle production → defeat", at the start of fluctuation after the end of the special game, "revival victory production "etc).

  In addition, the basic idea for realizing the playability of the third embodiment is a period during which a time saving game state (that is, a state in which the second main game start port electric role object B11d is likely to be in an open state) is maintained. It is in changing the expectation value which concerns on the total number of ball entering to the 2nd main game starting opening B10 in inside. Therefore, the gameplay that can be embodied based on such a thought is not limited to the example described above in the third embodiment, but various gameplays can be conceptualized, but as a basic idea, time is shortened The method of changing the expectation value concerning the total period length in which the gaming state is maintained, and the second main game start port electric role thing B11d is in the open state (the second main game start during the period in which the time reduction gaming state is maintained) The method can be broadly divided into a method of changing an expected value related to the total period length to maintain an open state) enough to enter the mouth B10. Therefore, although more specific methods for each method will be listed, it should be added that any combination of the listed methods is possible.

<Method to vary the expected value concerning the total period length during which the time saving gaming state is maintained>
-As described above in the third embodiment, a method of varying the variation time of the main gaming symbol-A method of varying the variation fixed time after the variation display of the main gaming symbol as illustrated in the present embodiment-small Opening interval period {so-called start demonstration period (waiting period until the first opening is made) or end demonstration period (small opening after the last opening is made) of the second big winning a prize electric motor vehicle C21d during the execution of the winning A method of changing the closing period when performing a series of operations of opening → closing → opening), a method of changing the number of times of fluctuation of the main game pattern (in this case, however) It is better to increase the probability that the success or failure judgment result on the main game symbol will be lost.)

<Method for changing the expected value concerning the total period length in which the second main game start port electric role B11d maintains the open state while the time saving gaming state is maintained>
-A method of varying the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol, or a method of varying the variation fixed time after the variation display of the auxiliary gaming symbol-The winning probability of the auxiliary gaming symbol (the selection probability of the hit symbol "D1" in this embodiment) A method of changing the second main game starting opening B10 A method of changing the opening mode (opening time) of the second main game starting opening electric character B11d (in this case, changing the opening time of one time to the second main game starting opening B10 Will change the expected number of ball

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, by configuring the limited frequency table to be referred to based on the small hit symbol, it is possible to change the expected number of occurrences of the second main game hold in the so-called power support state. Although configured as described above, the game characteristic can be realized without using the limited frequency table. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as a first modification of the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the first modification from the third embodiment is also a modification based on the third embodiment, any configuration shown in the third embodiment is the first modification from the third embodiment. It should be added that it is applicable.

  First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 7 in the first modification of the third embodiment. The point of change from the third embodiment is step 1247-1 (third modification 1), that is, after closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d in step 1244, step 1247-1 (third). In step 3), the second main game start opening electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B sets a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) in the standby time timer MP11t-H2 and starts the timer, and the step is performed. Shift to 1247-2 (third). As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the standby time from the closing of the second main game start opening electric role B11d to the start of symbol variation of a new auxiliary game symbol is 1 second. When you become a time-saving gaming state (so-called power support state) by doing it, make the symbol variation of the auxiliary gaming symbol as short as possible (in this example, 0.01 second), and start the second main game While making the mouth electric role B11d open immediately, the standby time from the closing of the second main game start opening electric role B11d to the start of symbol variation of the new auxiliary game symbol is stabilized (( As a result, the time interval from when a certain second main game hold occurs until the next second main game hold can be stabilized is stabilized).

  Next, FIG. 59 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the first modification from the third embodiment. In the first modification from the third embodiment, the time reduction game state on the second main game side and the fluctuation time determined on the hit (big hit, small hit) table in the main gaming table 3 is a reserve digest It is configured to be determined depending on the number of second main game holdings later. In addition, when "B0 (0.5 seconds)" is selected as the variation mode of the second main game symbol in balance with the control process of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d described above, the said During the symbol change, it is difficult to cause the second main game hold, and when "B2 (15 seconds)" is selected, the second main game hold is generated up to the upper limit number (four) during the symbol change. It is configured to be easy (If the standby time of the 2nd main game start opening electric role thing B11d is 1 second, and the game ball enters 1 ball into the 2nd main game start opening B10, the 2nd main game start opening In order to complete the opening of the motorized part B11d). In the first modification from the third embodiment, the second main game time reduction game state and the fluctuation time determined in the hit (big hit, small hit) table, the time after the reserve digestion 2 is configured to be determined depending on the number of main game holdings, "B2 (15 seconds)" is selected in about 1/10 of the case where the number of second main game holdings is 0, and the second main game When the number of reservations is 1 to 3, it is configured to select every fluctuation "B2 (15 seconds)", but the fluctuation time selected when the number of second main game reservations is 1 to 3 (Or a selection candidate of fluctuation time) is not limited to this, and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected every time, etc. The second main game hold number may be selected when it is 0 (long time (this example) In this case, a variation time different from the variation time of 15 seconds) may be configured to be selected when the number of second main game reservations is 1 to 3 .

  Further, the table surrounded by the dotted line of the main gaming table 3, that is, the table relating to the non-time shortening gaming state and the second main gaming is difficult to be executed as in the third embodiment. In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the configuration of the limited frequency (limit frequency table, etc.) is deleted (the configuration is essential in the third embodiment), but the modification from the third embodiment In Example 1, this is not a required configuration).

  In the first modification from the third embodiment, the variation time determined on the second main gaming side time reduction game state and the hit time (big hit, small hit time) table is the first time after the reserve digestion Although it was constituted to be decided depending on 2 main game reservation numbers, it is not limited to this, the fluctuation time which is decided with the particular table is decided depending on the 2nd main game reservation number before reservation digestion If it is configured as such, the variation time in the case of one pre-digestion reserve to be digested can be reliably made 15 seconds in the rush zone described later, It can be set as the structure which does not impair the game nature of this example. In other words, when the fluctuation time is determined depending on the number of reservations before the reservation, the case where one fluctuation is ended in one state and the reservation is digested, and the game is held in the state of zero In the modification example 1 from the third embodiment, since the table for determining the fluctuation time to be referred to can be made different in the case where the ball enters one ball at the main game starting opening, this characteristic is the characteristic in the first modification from the third embodiment. It is possible to use

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are steps 1777-1 (third variation 1) and steps 1777-2 (third variation 1), that is, in step 1777-1 (third variation 1), the specific game The control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol is the first main game big hit symbol (only 7A in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1777-1 (third change 1), the process proceeds to step 1776 (third), and in the case of No, the specified game control means MP50 is changed in step 1777-2 (third change 1). Then, with reference to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, it is determined whether or not the ended special game is a special game triggered by the second main game time short transition small hit symbol (7BK). If YES in step 1777-2 (third modification 1), the process goes to step 1776 (third), and if NO, the process goes to the next process (process in step 1800). In the first modification from the third embodiment, the termination condition of the time reduction gaming state is that the first main gaming symbol has been changed 10 times, or the second main gaming symbol has been changed 1 time, However, the termination condition of the time saving gaming state is not limited to this, for example, the sum of the number of times of fluctuation completion of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) It may be In addition, the termination condition of the time reduction gaming state may be combined, for example, the sum of the number of times of variation completion of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol reaches a predetermined number A (for example, 10 times), 1 The variation end number of the main game symbol reaches a predetermined number B (for example, 8 times), or the variation end number of the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined number C (for example, 5 times) The time reduction game state may be configured to end in the event that the game is played.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a game progress flowchart in the first modification from the third embodiment. The flow of the game shown in the game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Playing progress flow 1>
In the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game start port electric role B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to be opened, so-called non-power support state), the player starts the first main game start Aim the mouth A10 and shoot the game ball (make a so-called left strike) to proceed with the game. Then, if you win the big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, the big hit probability = 1/234), which is performed triggered by entering the ball into the first main game starting slot A10, it will be shown in the figure The first main game jackpot is won ", and after the symbol change of the first main game symbol based on the win is finished (after the big hit symbol of the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed), the predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for 2 rounds is executed (in this example, the first large winning opening C10 is opened, and "15 prize balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" per round) it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <playing progress flow 1> ends, the "rush challenge zone" (second main game start opening electric role thing B11d shown in the figure is a gaming state that is likely to be in the open state, By shifting to a so-called power support state = time reduction state, the player aims at the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d and fires a game ball (by performing a so-called right hit) to advance the game. , The second main game start opening B10 can be entered efficiently (with the ball entering the second main game start opening B10 as a trigger, it is a symbol of the winning lottery on the second main game side and the second main game symbol Fluctuations are made). However, under this circumstance, the hold on the second main game side (second main game hold) has not occurred.

<Game progress flow 3>
After that, the player rushes into the "rush challenge zone", and the player shoots the game ball aiming at the second main game start opening electric role object B11d (performs so-called right strike) to advance the game, and the second main A small hit in the variation of the second main gaming symbol pertaining to entering the game starting opening B10 (in the winning lottery pertaining to the second main game, it will be almost a small hit won to win in 1 / 1.01) When the player wins, after the symbol variation of the second main gaming symbol based on the winning is over (after the small hitting symbol of the second main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed), the small hitting game for one round is executed (In this example, the second large winning opening C20 is opened, but if configured as in the present embodiment, if the gaming ball is continuously fired to aim at the second large winning opening C20, It becomes almost definite to enter the V winning opening C22). Here, the variation time according to the small hit symbol depends on the number of reservations after reserve digestion as in the “second main game symbol variation time” in the lower left of the figure, but at the time of “normal game”, And, since the second main game hold is not generated during the big hit generated on the first main game side, when the second main game symbol fluctuation time in the "rush challenge zone" is determined, "0 hold number" The fluctuation time is determined by the distribution ratio of “(0.5 seconds 90%, 15 seconds 10%)”. Here, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, it is almost impossible for the second main game hold to occur substantially during the fluctuation of 0.5 seconds. While being configured, if the fluctuation time is 15 seconds, the second main game hold can be generated up to the upper limit number (four in this example) during the fluctuation of 15 seconds. When the second main game hold occurs, it will shift to the "rush zone" shown in the figure.

<Game progress flow 4>
In the "lash challenge zone" shown in the figure, after the end of the small hit game when the second main game hold can not be caused, "second main game small hit → big hit in the figure As shown in ", (attributable to entering the ball to the V winning opening C22) the jackpot (in the present example, two rounds) minutes of the predetermined maximum round number triggered the small hit game from the small hit game Until the special game is called a big hit) is executed (in this example, in the special game triggered by a small hit, the first large winning opening C10 is opened, "15 prize ball" × "9 per round" When the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds, approximately 250 pieces of game balls, including those obtained in a small hit game, remain as balls held by the player when "count" = "135 balls" is obtained).

<Game progress flow 5>
When the special game executed in the above <game progression flow 4> is ended, the second main game small hit symbol “which will shift to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game at a selection rate of 50% (for example, 50%) There are 1AK "and the 2nd main game small hit symbol" 2AK "which will shift to the non-time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game, and it is selected by 1AK: 2AK = 1: 1) The game state after the special game is over is determined based on the small hit symbol pertaining to the game. When the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the operation is the same as that of <game progress flow 3>, that is, it shifts to the "rush challenge zone". On the other hand, when the gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state, the non-time shortening gaming state and the second main game hold is zero, so that it shifts to the “normal game” shown in the figure. It will be.

<Game progress flow 6>
In addition, after the end of the small hitting game when transitioning to the "rush zone" in the above <game progression flow 3>, the predetermined maximum number of rounds (this In the example, a special game for two rounds) is to be executed, but there is a second main game hold, so after the end of the special game, the second main game hold is digested and the second main game The variation of the game pattern is executed, and a special game for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (two rounds in this example) is executed again (due to entering the V winning opening C22). In this manner, special games for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, two rounds) continue (due to entering the ball to the V winning opening C22) until the second main game holding becomes zero. Will be executed. In addition, the fluctuation time according to the second main game small hit symbol is always 15 seconds if there is a second main game hold, as in "second main game symbol fluctuation time" in the lower left of the figure. If it is possible to shift to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game on the second main game side because the second main game side is selected, the upper limit number of second main game holdings (in this example, four) (If, on the other hand, it shifts to the non-time shortening gaming state after the special game end of the 2nd main game side, it makes the 2nd main game hold occur during the fluctuation time of the 15 seconds concerned) Can not do). Therefore, in the "rush zone", after the end of the special game, before the non-time shortening gaming state and the second main game holding becomes 0, transition to the time shortening gaming state after the end of any special game If it can be made, it will be possible to create a playability that a total of 5 special games of 1 time of the variation and the 2nd main game reserve (for the upper limit number 4) are almost guaranteed. When the special game ends in the "rush zone" and the second non-time-saving gaming state is reached and there are 0 second main game holdings, the processing shifts to the "normal game" in the figure.

  In addition, as described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the configuration of the table for determining the variation time of the second main gaming symbol in the time-saving gaming state is referred to the number of holdings before holding. It is also possible to determine the fluctuation time, and by configuring as such, the fluctuation time related to the last hold in the "rush zone" (the hold when the number of the second main game hold becomes one) is also long It can be time (15 seconds fluctuation time).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment, the number of tables to be referred to at the time of determining the variation time of the second main gaming symbol in the time saving gaming state is The second main game hold on hold is set to the upper limit number (in this example, if it is configured to be determined depending on the number of holdings later) and the fluctuation time of a long time (15 seconds in this example) is selected. Up to 4), that is, it is possible to plunge into the continuous zone ("rush zone"), all the pendings that are caused are digested, and after the special game pertaining to the last When it does not shift to the time saving gaming state, the consecutive zone (“rush zone”) is ended. By configuring in this way, the entry condition of the continuous zone ("lash zone") is that a long fluctuation time is selected, while the continuous condition of the continuous zone ("lash zone") is It will be possible to create different innovative play characteristics of the rush condition and the continuation condition that the hold exists.

Fourth Embodiment
Here, in the present embodiment, when all the second main game holdings in the non-time saving gaming state are digested and the small hit can not be won, the game is returned to the left to play a game, which is advantageous for the player. Although the state is configured to end (return to the normal game), it may be configured to be in an advantageous state for the player again even after returning to the left. An example of such a configuration is taken as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the fourth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it should be added that the fourth embodiment can be applied to any configuration shown in the present embodiment.

  First, FIG. 62 is a front view of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that a second-type non-electric combination B12 is provided. When the game ball enters the second main game start opening B10, the second kind non-electric role thing B12 becomes open state, from the opening timing, the game ball enters the second kind non electric role thing B12 into two balls Is configured to be in a closed state. In addition, when one game ball enters the second type non-electric role thing B12, one second main game hold will occur.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 10 in the fourth embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is that the maximum number of 2nd main game hold is 2 points, and when the game ball enters the 2nd main game start slot B10, the second kind non-electric role thing is When the game ball enters the second ball after the timing of the opening, the second non-motorized part is to be closed. In addition, type 2 non-motorized items are non-motorized items (characters that are not electrically driven and controlled) and open or expand the entrance of the winning opening other than the big winning opening. , A game ball that operates when it has won a particular winning opening other than the winning opening, or passed a particular gate.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that the big hit symbol related to the first main game is provided, the big hit symbol to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit for the first main game (in this example 7A) And, the big hit symbol (in this example, 4A) which shifts to non time shortening game state after the big hit which relates to the 1st main game ends, it has provided.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is steps 1778 (fourth) to 1780 (fourth), that is, when it is after the end of the special game currently pertaining to the first main game side at step 1752, step 1778 In the (fourth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the big hit symbol during stop time shift big hit symbol (time reduction game state after the big hit end It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot symbol to shift to and, in this example, 7A). If the result is YES in step 1778 (fourth), then the process shifts to step 1755 (the time-saving gaming state is entered).

  On the other hand, if it is not after the end of the special game pertaining to the first main game side in step 1752, in step 1779 (fourth), the specified game control means MP50 performs the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b- After the end of the special game pertaining to the second main game symbol with reference to C (The special game pertaining to the second main game big hit symbol only, entering the V winning opening triggered by the stop of the second main game small hit symbol It is determined whether or not the special game pertaining to the ball is included. If Yes in step 1779 (fourth), the process moves to step 1755 (time reduction gaming state is entered). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1779 (the fourth), in other words, when the special game pertaining to the V winning opening C22 is over, in the step 1780 (the fourth), the specified game control means MP50 is the first and the second (2) With reference to the main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game pertaining to the small hit won in the time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 1780 (the fourth), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800) (the non-time shortening gaming state is entered), while if No, the process proceeds to step 1755 (time shortening game State).

  If NO in step 1778 (the fourth step), the process shifts to the next processing (the processing in step 1800) (the non-time shortening gaming state is entered).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, all the second main game holdings in the non-time shortening gaming state are digested, and even if the player can not win the small hit, the left strike In the game returned to, the second main game hold can be caused by entering the game ball into the second type non-electric combination, and the second main game hold can be made, and the second main game is played again by winning the small hit It is possible to create a novel play that pulls back the advantageous state that can be made advantageous to the person.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the fourth embodiment, the second non-motorized type is provided to bring back a state advantageous to the player, but the configuration using the second non-electric type is not limited to this. . An example of such a configuration is set as a first modification of the fourth embodiment, and only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the first modification from the fourth embodiment is also a modification based on the fourth embodiment, any configuration shown in the fourth embodiment is the first modification from the fourth embodiment. It should be added that it is applicable.

  In a first modification of the fourth embodiment, the second non-motorized combination B12 of the fourth embodiment is a left second-class non-electric combination B12, and the second non-motorized combination added is a second right It is considered as a species non-electric role thing B13. Further, the second main game start port B10 of the fourth embodiment is not the main game start port, and is a ball entry opening for opening the left second type non-electric role thing B12 and the right second type non-electric place B13 Because there is a non-motorized combination opening ball entry B15.

  First, FIG. 66 is a front view of the gaming machine in the first modification of the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the second non-motorized accessory B12 is disposed on the right side of the board, and the second main game starting opening B10 of the fourth embodiment is used as the non-motorized combination opening entrance ball opening B15. It is said that.

  With the above configuration, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the occurrence of the second main game hold and the non-electric role are Although both were configured to be opened, by placing the second non-motorized role B12 on the right side of the board, entry of the game ball to the non-motor role open entrance ball opening B15 is performed. The opening of the second non-electric role is executed, and the entering of the gaming ball to the second non-electronic role is to execute the second main game hold occurrence, to the second main game start opening B10 Unlike the fourth embodiment, which is to cause the second main game holding to occur while opening the second type non-electric character B12 due to entering the ball, one entrance is an action To configure the second main game hold occurs when you enter the second right non-motorized character B13, etc.) Can, so that the fairness of the game is collateral.

Fifth Embodiment
In the embodiment shown so far, various game characteristics are realized by configuring to execute the special game when entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game, but the V winning opening C22 It is possible to create new gameplay without providing it (ie, using the characteristics of only small hit games). Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the fifth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it should be added that the fifth embodiment can be applied to any configuration shown in the present embodiment.

  First, FIG. 67 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the distribution combination object control process and the V prize winning entrance ball determination process are deleted and that the number of winning balls in the second large winning opening C20 is 15 balls. In the fifth embodiment, since the small hit game is continuous and it is a game characteristic to obtain the game ball, therefore, the prize of the second big prize slot C20, which is a big prize port related to the small hit game. The number of balls is larger than that of the present embodiment (details will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) or (2) in FIG. 7 in the fifth embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is step 1650 (fifth), that is, after shifting the hold information in step 1406, in step 1650 (fifth), the specified game control means MP50 is a fall lottery to be described later. The execution process is executed, and the process moves to step 1408.

  Next, FIG. 69 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, a so-called probability fluctuation gaming state (a function of increasing the probability of winning the main gaming symbol) is provided as the gaming state relating to the main gaming. Moreover, in the fifth embodiment, the V winning opening C22 is not provided, and the small hit itself is configured not to be a transition trigger of the special game.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1650 (fifth) of FIG. 69 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/32), whether or not to shift from the random change gaming state to the normal gaming state Run the lottery). Next, in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the lottery result and determines whether or not the lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1656, in step 1658, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (the process of step 1408) Migrate to Also in the case of No in step 1652 or step 1656, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1408).

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 7 in the fifth embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is step 1604-1 (fifth), that is, when the condition device activation flag is on in step 1602, special game control is performed in step 1604-1 (fifth). The means MP30 turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game time short flag / auxiliary game time short flag) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1610.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1752-1 (fifth), step 1752-2 (fifth) and step 1755-1 (fifth) to step 1755-3 (fifth), ie, step At 1752-1 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b to determine whether it is after the end of the special game currently relating to the second main game side. In the case of Yes in step 1752-1 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b in step 1752-2 (fifth), and the stop symbol pertaining to the special game ended. It is determined whether or not the special game symbol (in this example, 7B) is a long time short count special game. In the case of Yes in step 1752-2 (fifth), in step 1755-1 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 is a predetermined number of times A for the time reduction number counter MP52c (it is a relatively large number, , 100 times) and move on to step 1755-2 (fifth).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752-1 (fifth) or step 1752-2 (fifth), in step 1755-3 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 performs a predetermined number of The number of times is relatively small, and in this example, it is set once, and the process shifts to step 1755-2 (fifth). Next, in step 1755-2 (fifth), the specified game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1756.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a game progress flowchart in the fifth embodiment. The flow of the game shown in the game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Playing progress flow 1>
In the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game start port electric role B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to be opened, so-called non-power support state), the player starts the first main game start Aim the mouth A10 and shoot the game ball (make a so-called left strike) to proceed with the game. Then, if you win the big hit lottery on the 1st main game side (in this example, the big hit probability = 1/256), which is performed triggered by entering the ball into the 1st main game start slot A10, it will be shown in the figure The first main game jackpot is won ", and after the symbol change of the first main game symbol based on the win is finished (after the big hit symbol of the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed), the predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for 10 rounds is executed (in this example, the first large winning opening C10 is opened, and "15 prize balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" per round) it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <game progression flow 1> is ended, the "alpha rush" (probability fluctuation gaming state, and the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d becomes open state shown in the figure) Since the game state is easy, and it shifts to a so-called power support state = time reduction state, the player aims the second main game start port electric role object B11d and shoots the game ball (performs so-called right-handed) By advancing the game, it is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 (at the entrance to the second main game start opening B10 as a trigger, the second main game side hit lottery and the second 2) Symbol variation of the main game symbol is performed).

<Game progress flow 3>
After that, it rushes into “Alpha Rush”, the player aims at the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d and shoots the game ball (performs so-called right strike) to advance the game, and the second main game Won a small hit (a small hit will be won to win at 1 / 1.01 in the lottery for the second main game) by the change of the second main game symbol related to entering the starting opening B10 Then, after the symbol variation of the second main gaming symbol based on the winning is over (after the small hitting symbol of the second main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed), the small hitting game for one round is executed ( In this example, the second big winning opening C20 is opened, but unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, in the fifth embodiment, since the V winning opening C22 is not provided, a small hit is triggered. As a jackpot won't win, but the small hit game itself gets out balls Rukoto has become possible). In addition, since the time saving gaming state ends with one change of the main gaming symbol (transition to the non-time shortening gaming state), it shifts to the non-time shortening gaming state at the end of the fluctuation related to the small hit. In addition, the probability fluctuation gaming state does not end depending on the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol. In addition, during the fluctuation related to the small hit, the second main game hold can occur up to the upper limit number (in this example, four), even after the game state has become non-time reduction gaming state, the occurrence In order to win a small hit almost because of the change related to the hold, during "Alpha Rush", a total of 5 small hits will be won. In addition, in the small hit, it is possible to win 9 counts in the second large winning opening C20 (the configuration of the second large winning opening C20 similar to the present embodiment, during the small hit game execution time The second large winning opening C20 is configured to be able to win nine balls), and is configured such that approximately one hundred forty small balls can be obtained by one small hit. Here, as shown in the “timing related to game progression” in the lower left of the figure, when the change of the second main game symbol in “Alpha Rush” is a change related to a small hit, the change end timing Since the time reduction game ends, the non-time reduction game state is in progress during the small hit. Since it is constituted in this way, since the game ball acquired by the small hit in "Alpha Rush" does not become the number of prize balls paid out in the time reduction gaming state, the prize balls paid out in the time reduction gaming state It is a fair game machine that can prevent the number from becoming too large.

<Game progress flow 4>
After the end of the "alpha rush", it shifts to "fall lottery with probability fluctuation game 1/32" shown in the figure, and the gaming state is probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, and the player Aim at the first main game start port A10 and fire the game ball (make a so-called left hit) to advance the game. In the fifth embodiment, when in the probability variation gaming state, the termination variation lottery of the probability variation gaming state at the start of variation of each variation (a lottery to shift to the non-probability variation gaming state, so-called fall lottery) is executed If the first main gaming side wins a big hit before winning the fall lottery, it shifts to “first main game big hit winning” shown in the figure, while the first main gaming side If a player wins the fall lottery before winning the jackpot, the game will shift to the "normal game" shown in the figure. In addition, since the fall lottery is executed even in the change during the "alpha rush", when the fall lottery is won during the "alpha rush", the "normal" shown in the figure after the "alpha rush" is finished. It will shift to "game".

<Game progress flow 5>
The second round where the largest round (15R in this example) is executed in the second main game side fluctuation (maximum 5 fluctuations including the second main game suspension) in "Alpha Rush". If you win the game big hit symbol (In this example, the ratio that the second main game big hit symbol where the 10R special game is executed is selected ratio: the second main game big hit symbol where the 15R special game is executed is selected In the ratio = 99: 1), it will shift to the "super alpha rush" shown in the figure, and after the big hit of the 15R concerned, 100 times of time will be granted 100 times and the time-saving gaming state concerned And the remaining reserve of the second main gaming side after the end of the fluctuation for the time-limited number of wins will win the small hit, and a maximum of 104 small hits will be won, ie, "104 times" × "140 balls" = "14 So that the 60-ball "of winning balls can be obtained. Incidentally, if the player wins a big hit in the "super alpha rush", the "super alpha rush" is ended, and the "alpha rush" is shifted to. By being configured in this manner, in the "super alpha rush", it is more likely to win the fall lottery than the probability change gaming state without winning the fall lottery, and the normal gaming state (non-probability change gaming state and It will be advantageous for the player to shift to the non-time saving gaming state) and to lower the jackpot probability. In addition, when the fluctuation of 100 times, which is the time-saving number of times in the "super alpha rush", is ended, the "normal game" shown in the drawing is performed.

  By configuring as described above, in the fifth embodiment, the V winning opening C22 is not provided, and the structure of the second large winning opening C20 similar to the present embodiment (second small winning opening C20 at the time of small hit game execution) The game ball of the maximum count number can enter in), that the small hit on the 2nd main game side wins almost every fluctuation, and the 2nd main game holding upper limit number is plural (in this example, 4 pieces) As a result, it is possible to obtain a predetermined number of game balls by winning one small hit, and to create novel game characteristics such as obtaining a game ball by successive small hits. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the probability variation gaming state may not be provided as the gaming state relating to the main game, and as in the present embodiment, the gaming state relating to the main game is the normal gaming state (non-time shortening gaming state And time saving game state may be only.

  In the fifth embodiment, the probability change gaming state is configured to end by winning the falling lottery, but the number of predetermined changes (for example, 10 changes) after the configuration is shifted to the probability change gaming state May be configured not to win the fall lottery (probability fluctuation gaming state does not end), and may be configured to execute the fall lottery with each change after the predetermined number of times of change progress (when configured as such It is desirable to configure so that it does not fall during "alpha rush"). Further, in the fifth embodiment, the special game and the special game are the same as the special game which is to be transferred to the "alpha rush", as the special game which is to be shifted to the "alpha rush". It may be configured to execute an effect such that "Alpha Rush" is one special game in succession.

Sixth Embodiment
In addition to the configurations of the embodiments described so far, it is possible to create new playability with a configuration having a small hit and a V winning opening C22. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is taken as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the sixth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it should be added that the sixth embodiment can be applied to any configuration shown in the present embodiment.

  First, FIG. 74 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that two auxiliary game starting ports are provided. That is, it is easy to enter the ball when hitting left, and it is difficult (or impossible) to enter when hitting the right. The auxiliary game start port is the first auxiliary game start port H10-1, and it is hit left. It is hard to enter the ball (or impossible), and the auxiliary game start port that is easy to enter when hitting the right is the second auxiliary game start port H10-2. In addition, the first auxiliary game start opening H10-1 is provided with a first auxiliary game start opening entrance detection device H11 s-1 for detecting entry into the start opening, and the second auxiliary game start The mouth H10-2 is provided with a second auxiliary game start mouth entrance ball detection device H11s-2 for detecting a ball entering the start port. In the sixth embodiment, the second main game start opening B10 is provided at a position where it is difficult (or impossible) to enter when hitting the left and easy to enter when hitting the right. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be provided at a position where it can hit the ball in a left or right strike (for example, below the first main game start opening A10). By configuring in this way, the left main ball is entered into the first auxiliary game start port H10-1, and the second main game start port electric role B11d is opened by the game ball entering the left side, the left By continuing the hitting, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second main game start port B10. In addition, only one auxiliary game start port may be provided, and when configured as such, the position of the auxiliary game start port may be hit on the left and when it is hit on the right. In any of the above, it is configured to be provided at a position where the game ball can enter the auxiliary game start opening, or, if the left strike is performed, all the winning openings (first main Configuration to be able to enter the game start opening, the second main game start opening, the first large winning opening, the second large winning opening, the auxiliary game starting opening, etc.) (if left running, there is no problem It is desirable to configure the game board surface so that the game can proceed. Even if the auxiliary game start port is added to the configuration of the sixth embodiment (for example, three are provided), there is no problem at all.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 (sixth) in FIG. 7. First, in step 1110, the auxiliary game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball enters the first auxiliary game start port H10-1 (in the case of inflow, in the case of a gate, it passes). . If Yes in step 1110, the process proceeds to step 1118. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1110, in step 1114, the auxiliary game start slot ball determining means MJ11-H enters the game ball into the second auxiliary game start slot H10-2 (flow, in the case of gate, passes). It is determined whether it has been done. In the case of Yes in step 1114, in step 1118, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H and whether or not the hold ball is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) Determine if In the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H is an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, auxiliary game success or failure determination random number, auxiliary game symbol winning random number, auxiliary game variation mode determination random number, Etc.). Next, in step 1122, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ 32 -H holds the holding ball in the form of setting the random number in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32 b-H together with the information of the second hold. Add one. Next, at step 1124, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H is an auxiliary game hold generation command (a command to the sub side, a command related to a hold random number generated by the auxiliary game side, generation of a hold For transmitting to the sub main control unit side a command relating to information as to whether the starting opening that triggered the operation is the first auxiliary gaming starting opening H10-1 or the second auxiliary gaming starting opening H10-2. The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). Also in the case of No in step 1114 or step 1118, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. The differences from the present embodiment are the steps 1208 (sixth) to 1211 (sixth), step 1225 (sixth), step 1230 (sixth), step 1231 (sixth), and step 1233-1 (sixth). 6), 1233-2 (sixth) and step 1252 (sixth) to step 1256 (sixth), that is, in step 1206, if there is a holding ball for the auxiliary game pattern, step 1208 (sixth) In the auxiliary game success or failure lottery means MN11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to obtain the game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time short flag) on the auxiliary game side, and also the auxiliary game success or failure lottery With reference to the table MN11ta-H (auxiliary gaming table 1), the supplementary gaming side based on the acquired gaming state on the supplementary gaming side and the supplementary gaming success / failure random number (auxiliary gaming side random number) based on the holding ball Run the game propriety lottery temporarily stored in the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

  Here, FIG. 77 shows an example of the supplementary game acceptance lottery table MN11ta-H (auxiliary game table 1). As shown in the figure, in the sixth embodiment, when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, the probability that the auxiliary game success or failure lottery result is won is higher than in the case where the auxiliary game time short flag is on. There is. Incidentally, as exemplified in the “modification example of the auxiliary game table 1”, there is no problem even if the distribution of the random number of the hit and the loss in the auxiliary game win / off lottery is changed.

  Next, in step 1209 (sixth), the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H (auxiliary gaming table 2), and the result of the corresponding lottery performed and the said Based on the auxiliary game symbol random number (auxiliary game random number) based on the holding ball, the stop symbol is determined and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, FIG. 77 shows an example of the auxiliary gaming symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H (auxiliary gaming table 2). As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, random number distribution of the auxiliary game stop symbol is the same random number distribution regardless of whether the auxiliary game time short flag is on or off. In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that an auxiliary game success or failure random number and an auxiliary game symbol random number might be acquired as different random numbers, it is not limited to this, For example, the information which concerns on an auxiliary game symbol random number is provided It may be configured as follows. When configured as such, it is desirable to configure to make the random distribution of the auxiliary gaming stop symbol different according to the gaming state of the auxiliary gaming side (in order to make the winning rate of the auxiliary gaming symbol different according to the gaming state).

  Next, in step 1210 (sixth), the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H refers to the lottery table MN51ta-H (auxiliary game table 3) for determining the auxiliary game variation mode, and the gaming state (the auxiliary game side) Based on the flag status of the auxiliary game time short flag and the auxiliary game variation mode random number (auxiliary game side random number) based on the holding ball, the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H for a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol ( For example, 4 seconds are set when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time short flag is off.

  Here, FIG. 77 shows an example of the auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H (auxiliary game table 3). As shown in the figure, in the sixth embodiment, when the auxiliary game time short flag is off, there are five types of fluctuation time that can be determined, while the auxiliary game time short flag is on. The number of types of fluctuation time that can be determined is one, and the type of fluctuation time is greater when the auxiliary game short flag is off. In addition, when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is configured to be relatively short as compared with the case where the auxiliary game time short flag is on. It should be noted that there is no problem in changing the variation mode (variation time) of the auxiliary gaming symbol, but if the auxiliary gaming time short flag is off, plural types of variation modes so that the player does not detect the stop timing of the auxiliary gaming symbol. It is preferable to configure to have (variation time) (when the auxiliary gaming stop symbol is a hit symbol, the timing of opening of the second main game start opening electric bonus B11d according to the hit symbol is There is no problem even if the player recognizes the stop timing of the auxiliary game symbol when the auxiliary game time short flag is off, in order to prevent the game ball from being shot at aim), so the auxiliary game time short flag is off. It is preferable to be configured to have fewer types of variation modes (variation time) than in the case.

  Next, in step 1211 (sixth), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H is a command related to the determined auxiliary gaming symbol information and the auxiliary gaming side gaming state information (a command to the sub side, the auxiliary gaming variation start The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command, etc.) to the sub main control unit side is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process shifts to step 1220.

  In addition, in step 1224, when the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol is reached, in step 1225 (sixth), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H relates to the fact that the auxiliary gaming symbol is stopped and displayed. The command (a command to the sub side) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit side (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), step 1226 Migrate to In addition, after the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag is turned off in step 1228, in step 1230 (sixth), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, It is determined whether or not the auxiliary game stop symbol is a hit symbol (in this example, L · S). In the case of Yes in step 1230 (sixth), in the step 1231 (sixth), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and the auxiliary gaming stop symbol is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it is a hit symbol (in this example, L). In the case of Yes in step 1231 (sixth), in step 1233 (sixth), the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B is the auxiliary gaming side of the game state and stop symbol (this example Then, based on L), the open mode (for example, 0.5 second open → 0.5 second closed → 5 second open → closed) is determined, and the second main game start port electric role open timer MP22t-B is electrically driven. A predetermined time relating to the opening time (opening and closing time) of the bonus is set, and the process proceeds to step 1234. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1231 (sixth), at step 1233-2 (sixth), the second main game start port electric combination open / close control means MP20-B is the game state and stop of the auxiliary game side Based on the symbol (in this example, S), the open / close mode (for example, 0.5 second open → closed) is determined, and the second main game start opening electric combination open timer MP22t-B opens time of the electric combination ( A predetermined time related to the opening and closing time) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1234.

  Here, FIG. 77 shows an example of the motorized character opening time determination table MN81ta (the auxiliary game table 3-1 and the auxiliary game table 3-2). As shown in the figure, in the sixth embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the second main game start opening electric role B11d is different depending on the on / off of the auxiliary game time short flag and the hit symbol on the auxiliary game side. It is done. In the present embodiment, the first opening time of the second main game start opening electric role B11d is the longest when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "L" and the auxiliary game time short flag is off (in this example, 5 seconds). In addition, an opening and closing mode in which the opening time of the second main game start opening electric winning combination B11d is longest is referred to as a special opening and closing mode.

  In step 1236, after the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is released, in step 1248 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. The open / close mode set is the special open / close mode ("0.5 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed → 5 seconds open → closed"), with the auxiliary game stop symbol "L", and auxiliary It is determined whether or not the opening / closing mode that can be set when the game time short flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1248 (sixth), in step 1252 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is a special opening / closing mode start command (a command to the sub side, and the opening time according to the special opening / closing mode Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit side (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and Transition to 1242 Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 1202 or step 1248 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1242.

  In step 1246, after turning off the electric character opening flag, in step 1254 (sixth), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, The set open / close mode is the special open / close mode ("0.5 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed → 5 seconds open → closed"), the auxiliary game stop symbol is "L", and the auxiliary game time short flag It is determined whether or not the open / close mode) that can be set when the switch is off. In the case of Yes in step 1254 (sixth), in the step 1256 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is a special open / close mode end command (a command to the sub side, the open time according to the special open / close mode Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit side (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and Processing proceeds to processing (processing of step 1300). Also in the case of No in step 1230 (sixth) or step 1254 (sixth), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1300).

  Next, FIG. 78 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the step 3100 (sixth), the step 3400 (sixth), the step 3500 (sixth), the step 3600 (sixth) and the step 3700 (sixth), that is, the step 3100 At (6th), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a hold information management / hold display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2200. Further, after execution of the decorative symbol display control process of step 2300, in step 3400 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes an auxiliary game secondary game display content determination process described later. Next, in step 3500 (sixth), the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes an auxiliary game secondary game display control process described later. Next, in step 3600 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a suspension information prior determination process described later, and shifts to step 2400. In addition, after executing the special game related display control process in step 2400, in step 3700 (sixth), the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a secondary game display area size change control process described later, It transfers to step 2700.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the hold information management / hold display control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (sixth) of FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a new hold generation command of the auxiliary game side has been received from the main control board M side. Do. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 increments (increments) 1 by the auxiliary game hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 mounts the information and the auxiliary game side random number relating to the starting opening which is the trigger of the hold generation on the auxiliary game side received from the main control board M side. The temporary storage unit SM 22 b temporarily stores the temporary storage information SM 22 b and proceeds to step 3116. In the sixth embodiment, the main control board M is configured to directly transmit the random value, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the symbol information (previously determined result of adjudication, stop symbol, variation mode, etc.) derived based on random numbers from the main control board M side is transmitted It may be configured. On the other hand, if No in step 3102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 3108, and new symbol information on the auxiliary game side from the main control board M side If so, it is determined whether or not symbol change has been received). If YES in step 3108, in step 3110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts 1 from the value of the auxiliary game hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Next, in step 3112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the auxiliary gaming side random number relating to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b, and shifts the remaining hold information Do. Then, at step 3114, the effect display control means SM20 turns on the auxiliary game secondary game content determination permission flag in the advance notice related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3116. In the case of No at step 3108, the process proceeds to step 3116. In the present embodiment, the auxiliary game holding number is not displayed on the effect display device SG. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the auxiliary game holding number may be displayed.

  Next, in step 3116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives a new hold generation command for the first main game side from the main control board M side. Determine if If Yes in step 3116, in step 3118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 increments (increments) the first main gaming clothes hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Next, in step 3120, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 mounts the winning order and the first main game side random number according to the hold information on the first main game side received from the main control board M side. The temporary storage means SM22b temporarily stores, and proceeds to step 3130. Then, in step 3130, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the same number of hold displays as the first main game clothes hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in the first hold display section SG12 A lamp image to be displayed, which may be hereinafter referred to as a first main game dressing reserve lamp) is executed, and the process shifts to step 3132. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 3122, and new symbol information of the first main game side from the main control board M side. (In other words, it is determined whether or not to start symbol variation). If the result of step 3122 is YES, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts 1 from the value of the first main game clothes hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b in step 3124. Next, in step 3126, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the first main game side random number relating to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information (hold Digest. Then, in step 3128, the effect display control means SM20 turns on the main game supplementary secondary game content determination permission flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3130. In the case of No at step 3122, the process proceeds to step 3132.

  Next, in step 3132, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives a new hold generation command for the second main game side from the main control board M side. Determine if If Yes in step 3132, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 adds (increment) 1 to the second main game clothes holding hold value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b in step 3134. Next, in step 3136, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 mounts a winning order and a second main game side random number according to the hold information on the second main game side received from the main control board M side. The temporary storage means SM22b temporarily stores, and proceeds to step 3146. Then, in step 3146, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the same number of hold displays as the second main game clothing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in the second hold display section SG13 A lamp image to be displayed, which may hereinafter be referred to as a second main game dressing reserve lamp) is executed, and the process shifts to the next process (the process of step 2200). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3132, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b at step 3138, and new symbol information of the second main game side from the main control board M side. (In other words, it is determined whether or not to start symbol variation). If YES in step 3138, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts 1 from the second main game clothes holding hold value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b in step 3140. Next, in step 3142, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the second main game side random number relating to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information (hold Digest. Then, in step 3144, the effect display control means SM20 turns on the main game supplementary secondary game content determination permission flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3146. In the case of No at step 3138, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game secondary game display content determination process according to a subroutine of step 3400 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in the sixth embodiment, the purpose is to configure the variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as roulette effect) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the auxiliary gaming symbol executable, but as described later, The variable display result is configured not only to notify or suggest the game result on the auxiliary game side, but also to notify or suggest the game result on the main game side. First, at step 3402, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the auxiliary game secondary game content determination permission flag in the advance notice related information temporary storage means SM24b is on. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n turns off the auxiliary game secondary game content determination permission flag in the preliminary notification related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3406, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n is temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the auxiliary gaming side gaming state information transmitted from the main control board M in step 1211 Confirm. Next, in step 3408, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines whether or not the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side is in the non-time shortening game based on the confirmation result of the gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3450 (sixth), the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n executes an auxiliary game secondary game content determination process to be described later. That is, the roulette effect described later is configured to be executed only during the non-time shortening gaming state.

  Next, at step 3420, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n sets the roulette effect execution permission flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (on / off is determined in the auxiliary game secondary game content determining process described later) It is determined whether the flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3420, in step 3422, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n turns off the roulette effect execution permission flag in the preliminary notification related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3424, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines the final result of the roulette effect (determined in the auxiliary game secondary game content determination process to be described later, and in this example, “losing”, “assist game winning” and Based on symbol information from the main control board M side (in particular, the variation time value of the auxiliary gaming symbol), the roulette effect content determination lottery table SM 27 ta is referred to, based on which one of the “main game winning” is determined. The production mode and execution timing of the roulette effect are determined, and are temporarily stored in the preliminary production-related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Here, FIG. 81 (secondary game table 2-1) is an example of a roulette effect determination lottery table SM 27 ta (in particular, a roulette effect presentation mode and an execution timing determination table). As shown in this example, in the sixth embodiment, based on the variation time value of the auxiliary gaming symbol and the final result of the roulette effect, the effect mode and the execution timing of the roulette effect are configured to be determined by lottery. . For example, when the variation time value of the auxiliary gaming symbol is "10.0 seconds" and the final result of roulette effect is "loss", "roulette effect 1", "roulette effect 2" as the effect mode of roulette effect Is determined by the selection probability “500/512” and “12/512”, respectively, and the execution timing of the roulette effect is determined to be “5.0 seconds”. Then, as described later, the roulette arrangement pattern to be displayed in the roulette effect is determined based on the effect mode of the roulette effect, and the display of the determined roulette arrangement pattern is triggered by reaching the execution timing of the roulette effect. Will be started. In addition, the production | presentation aspect and execution timing of a roulette effect, and selection probability are an example to the last, and are not limited at all in this.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 3426, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines the roulette performance based on the determined roulette effect mode (temporarily stored in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). The roulette arrangement pattern to be displayed in the roulette effect is determined with reference to the effect content determination lottery table SM27ta, and temporarily stored in the advance effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Here, FIG. 81 (secondary game table 2-2) is an example of a roulette effect content determination lottery table SM27ta (in particular, a roulette arrangement pattern determination table). As shown in this example, in the sixth embodiment, the roulette arrangement pattern displayed in the roulette effect is uniquely determined based on the effect mode of the roulette effect. For example, when the effect mode of roulette effect is “roulette effect 1”, any one of “─”, “motorized character opening”, and “big winning opening opening” in each frame of roulette frame numbers 0 to 9 An arrangement pattern (a roulette arrangement pattern 1) in which pieces are arranged is configured to be displayed. Here, "electrically held product opening" means display content notifying that the second main game starting opening electrically operated character B11d is opened, while "big winning opening open" is the first This means that the display content is to notify that the special winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20 is opened (transition to a special game). That is, as will be described later, the contents that can be notified as the final result of the roulette effect include not only the success or failure result on the auxiliary game side but also the success or failure result on the main game side. In addition, the display content distributed in each frame is not limited to this, and may be a display content that suggests the success or failure result on the auxiliary game side and the success or failure result on the main game side (for example, roulette As indicated by the arrangement pattern 2, when the frame “open !?” is stopped and displayed, a notification notifying that there is a possibility that the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is opened If it is displayed as a content, or if a piece with the word "chance!" Is stopped and displayed, it will be displayed as a display content notifying that there is a possibility of shifting to a special game, or a piece with "open !!" When the stop display is displayed, the display content informs that the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is determined to be released, or the top of the frame of "super hot !!!!" stop display If it is, it will be decided to shift to a special game And display contents for informing the fact, etc.). The roulette such as the roulette array pattern 4 in which the winning on the auxiliary gaming side is decided is selected only when the auxiliary gaming side is winning, but may be selected if the auxiliary gaming side is winning. It is desirable that the roulette array pattern is most difficult to select (or relatively difficult to select). In addition, when the auxiliary gaming side is elected, as the contents which can be informed as the final result of the roulette effect, the piece which suggests the winning of the auxiliary gaming side such as “Open !?” and “Open !!” is relatively It is desirable to be configured so that it is easy to be stop displayed, and a piece that suggests non-winning of the auxiliary game side such as "-" is relatively difficult to be stopped displayed, and "auxiliary game?" It may be configured such that only the piece that suggests the side's winning is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the main game side is won, as the contents which can be informed as the final result of roulette effect, the piece which suggests the main game side win such as “high heat !!”, “chance!” Is relatively It is desirable to be configured so that it is easy to be stopped and displayed, and it is relatively difficult for a piece such as "-" that suggests non-winning of the main game side to be relatively stopped and displayed. In addition, when the auxiliary game side is won, the main game side sets “the stop display rate of the frame which suggests the auxiliary game side won: the stop display rate of the frame which suggests the non-winning of the auxiliary game side = 9: 1”. In the case of winning, the auxiliary gaming side is won, for example, “stop display ratio of the frame suggesting the main game side winning: stop display ratio of the frame suggesting non-winning of the main game side = 1: 1”, etc. It is desirable that the stop display ratio of the frame indicating the main gaming side winning in the case where the main game side is winning be lower than the stop display ratio of the frame informing the auxiliary game side winning in the case . Further, in the sixth embodiment, in the non-time shortening game state (or the state where the auxiliary game time short flag is off), when the opening and closing mode of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d becomes the special opening and closing mode The roulette effect is always executed (when the auxiliary game side is won), while the roulette effect is only partially executed when the main game side is a big hit Although the roulette effect execution frequency may be changed, for example, the roulette effect relating to the winning on the auxiliary game side may be long when the main game side is winning, and for a long time such as super reach etc. Always run when the fluctuation time of 60 seconds (for example, fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more) is not selected, and the roulette effect concerning the winning of the main gaming side is executed at 5% when the main gaming side is won etc. Percentage roulette effect for winning the auxiliary game side is performed, it is desirable to configure to be higher than the rate at which the roulette demonstration is performed for winning the main game side.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, at step 3428, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines the roulette frame number to be the stop display position for notifying the final result based on the final result of the roulette effect and the roulette array pattern. (For example, in the case of final result = "losing", any of the pieces on which "─" is arranged, and in the case of final result = "auxiliary game winning", "motorized opening of bonus" is arranged If any of the frames, the final result = "main game winning", it determines one of the frames on which "large winning opening opening" is arranged), temporary storage in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b Do. Next, in step 3430, the roulette effect contents determination means SM 27 n turns on the auxiliary game secondary game contents determination flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM 24 b, and the next process {the process of step 3500 (sixth)} Migrate to Also in the case of No at step 3402, step 3408 or step 3420, the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 3500 (sixth)}.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game secondary game content determination process according to the subroutine of step 3450 (sixth) in FIG. 80 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3452, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and confirms the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol transmitted from the main control board M side in step 1211. Next, in step 3454, the roulette effect contents determination means SM 27n determines whether the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol is "L" or not, based on the confirmation result, in other words, the stop indication of the auxiliary gaming symbol Later, it is determined whether or not the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is scheduled to execute the special opening and closing mode. In the case of Yes in step 3454, in step 3456, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is a change based on entering the ball into the first auxiliary game start opening H10-1. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 3456, in step 3458, the final result of the roulette effect is determined as "auxiliary game winning". Then, in step 3488, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27 n turns on the roulette effect execution permission flag in the flag area of the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM 24 b, and performs the next process {process of step 3420 (sixth)} Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3454, at step 3462, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines the final result of the roulette effect as “losing”. Here, the determination is a provisional determination, and as described later, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the final result of the roulette effect is replaced from “loss” to “main game winning”. In the sixth embodiment, as the predetermined condition, "an executability determination process based on the number of pending main game symbols", "an executability determination process based on the change status of the main game symbols", and "a secondary game for a main game There are four examples of “Execution possibility determination process 1” based on the execution situation of “2” and “Execution possibility determination process 2 based on the execution situation of the main game secondary game”.

(Execution possibility determination processing based on the number of reservations of the main game symbol)
Next, at step 3464, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n executes the roulette effect with or without a predetermined lottery probability based on the first main game clothing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Run. Here, as an example of the executability lottery, when the value of the first main game dressing reserve counter value is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), there is a high probability compared to the case of the predetermined number or more It can be mentioned that it is configured to win. Next, in step 3466, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines whether or not the executability lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3466, the process proceeds to step 3468. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3466, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3420 (sixth)}.

(Execution possibility determination processing based on the change situation of the main game design)
Next, at step 3468, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the flag in the flag pattern in the flag area of the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b is on, in other words, the main game symbol It is determined whether or not the decorative symbol that is the corresponding secondary game is being variably displayed. In the case of No in step 3468, the process proceeds to step 3488, while in the case of Yes in step 3468, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines the timer value Ts of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the main control in step 3470. Confirm the fluctuation time value Th of the auxiliary game pattern transmitted from the board M side, calculate "Ts + Th", and also temporarily store in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the final temporary stop timing of the decoration pattern (In this example, it compares with the time value Te which becomes temporary stop timing of middle row). Next, at step 3472, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines whether the condition of “Ts + Th <Te” is satisfied based on the comparison result. In the case of Yes in step 3472, the process proceeds to step 3474, and in the case of No in step 3472, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3420). Here, to supplement the explanation of this processing, the case satisfying the condition of “Ts + Th <Te” is before the game result on the main game side (the content of the stop symbol of the main game symbol) is definitely notified. , The situation where the final result of the roulette effect is informed. That is, when the game result on the main game side being executed concurrently is notified as the final result of the roulette effect, it is ensured that the game result on the main game side can not be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a situation where the game result on the main game side can change, in other words, the roulette effect may be executed across a plurality of changes of the main game symbol. In that case, the final result of the roulette effect is a game result of the main game side being executed at the end of the roulette effect (a game result relating to the suspension of the main game side which is undigested when the roulette effect is determined) ) May be determined in advance. In addition, as in this example, when the main control board M side is configured to be able to select a plurality of types of fluctuation time as the fluctuation time value of the auxiliary gaming symbol, “Ts + Th <Te” on the main control board M side. In order to satisfy the condition which becomes, in other words, it can be adjusted by forcedly selecting the fluctuation time which becomes a shorter time as the fluctuation time value of the auxiliary gaming symbol so that it falls within the fluctuation remaining time of the main gaming symbol. It may be configured as follows.

(Execution possibility determination processing 1 based on the execution situation of the main game secondary game)
Next, in step 3474, the roulette effect contents determination unit SM27n changes the decoration pattern temporally stored in the advance effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the display timing of the advance effect, and the advance effect type to be displayed, Based on the timer value Ts of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t, the notice effect display period relating to the specific notice effect (in the present example, the notice effect type 2) is confirmed. For example, if the timer value Ts is 5 seconds (after 5 seconds from the start of variation of the decorative symbol) and the display of the notice effect type 2 is determined, 5 seconds to 10 seconds later becomes the notice effect type 2 It becomes the notice effect display period which concerns. Next, at step 3476, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines, based on the confirmation result, whether or not the advance notice effect display period overlaps the execution period of the roulette effect. In the case of Yes in step 3476, the process proceeds to step 3478, while in the case of No in step 3476, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3420). Here, supplementary explanation of the process means that the specific advance notice effect means an effect in which display availability of the advance effect is determined depending on whether or not the sub input button is operated, and the operation of the sub input button in the advance effect display period It is an effect that a message prompting is displayed. That is, when the effect requiring the operation action by the player is performed as described above, the execution of the roulette effect is canceled.

(Execution possibility determination processing 2 based on the execution situation of the main game secondary game)
Next, at step 3478, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n is determined based on the variation pattern of the decorative symbol temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and the timer value Ts of the dressing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. The lottery probability of roulette effect is executed with the lottery probability of. Here, as an example of the executability lottery, when the execution period of roulette effect falls within the period before reaching the reach occurrence, the roulette effect execution period within the period before the reaching occurrence as an example of the execution possibility lottery It can be mentioned to be configured to win with a high probability as compared with the case in which Next, at step 3480, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines whether or not the executability lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3480, the process proceeds to step 3482. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3480, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3420). Here, supplementary explanation of this processing, the effect executed after reaching is an effect to be watched for the player, in particular, in the predetermined period after reaching, the game result on the main game side will be any result Sometimes it is expressed by a highly entertaining rendition. That is, when the highly entertaining effect is performed as described above, the roulette effect is easily canceled.

  After the roulette effect executability determination process is performed as described above, in step 3482, the roulette effect content determining means SM 27 n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b to display the main game symbol that is to be displayed for a stop. Check the stop symbol (or the stop symbol of the decorative symbol). Next, in step 3484, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines whether or not the stop display is scheduled for the jackpot symbol based on the confirmation result. In the case of No in step 3484, the process proceeds to step 3488, while in the case of Yes in step 3484, the roulette effect content determination means SM 27n determines the final result of roulette effect from "missing" to "main game winning" in step 3486 Replace to step 3488. In the case of No at step 3456, the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 3420 (sixth)}.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game secondary game display control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, at step 3502, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game secondary game content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the roulette effect display control unit SM27-1 turns off the auxiliary game secondary game content determination flag in the preliminary notification related information temporary storage unit SM24b. Next, at step 3506, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 turns on the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the flag area of the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 3508, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 starts the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM27t, and proceeds to step 3510. In the case of No at step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3510.

  Next, in step 3510, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the flag area of the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether the roulette effect execution monitoring flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3510, in step 3512, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 executes the roulette effect temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b as the timer value of the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM27t. It is determined whether the timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3512, in step 3514, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 is a display area different from "display area 1" in the main game decoration symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. The "display area 2" which is a display area for a predetermined number of frames (3 frames) in the roulette array pattern is displayed. Next, at step 3516, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 sets each frame (in the present example, the roulette frame number 0 to 0) based on the roulette array pattern temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. 9) are sequentially displayed at low speed in the "display area 2" (for example, the variable display of the number of seconds passing one frame = 0.3). Next, at step 3518, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines whether or not the roulette array pattern has made one turn by the variable display. In the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 sets each frame (in this example, roulette) based on the roulette array pattern temporarily stored in the preliminary notice related information temporary storage means SM24b. The frame numbers 0 to 9 are sequentially displayed at high speed in the “display area 2” (for example, the display is changed with the number of seconds passing one frame = 0.1), and the process shifts to step 3530. If the result of the step 3512 or the step 3518 is NO, the process moves to a step 3530.

  Next, at step 3530, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the supplementary game symbol has been stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3530, in step 3532, the roulette effect display control means SM 27-1 indicates that the timing at which the final result of the roulette effect can be reached has arrived, in other words, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d Informs that it can be released for a long time (for example, in the roulette effect during variable display, the roulette frame number to be the stop display position and the frame number before and after are displayed with fluctuation in the “display area 2”). Next, at step 3534, the roulette effect display control means SM 27-1 determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the notification. In the case of Yes in step 3534, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 stops the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM 27t and resets (zero clears) the timer value in step 3536. Next, in step 3538, the roulette effect display control means SM 27-1 finalizes and displays the roulette frame number to be the stop display position in the roulette effect in the “display area 2” (not shown in this example, The result of the roulette effect may be notified before the auxiliary gaming symbol variation ends). Next, at step 3540, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 turns off the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the flag area of the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3541, the roulette effect display control means SM 27-1 determines whether or not the final result of the executed roulette effect is “assist game winning” (the final result of the roulette effect is step 3458 or step Determined in 3462). In the case of Yes at step 3541, the effect presentation control means SM29 during opening turns on the effect execution permission flag during opening in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24 b at step 3542, and proceeds to step 3544. Even when the result of the step 3510, the step 3530, the step 3534 or the step 3541 is No, the process shifts to the step 3544.

  Next, at step 3544, the in-opening effect display control means SM29 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether the in-opening effect execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3544, in step 3546, the effect display control means SM29 during opening refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special opening / closing mode start command is newly received from the main side. . In the case of Yes in step 3546, in step 3548, the effect display control means SM29 performs an effect during opening (effect that the second main game start port electric role object B11d is open in a special opening / closing mode) The command to be set is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 3550. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3546, the processing shifts to step 3550.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is opened in the special opening and closing mode based on the entry of the game ball to the second auxiliary game start opening H10-2 is open, open The middle effect is configured not to be executed, but when returning from the power-off, the second main game start opening motorized role B11d is opening in the special opening / closing mode (ie, opening in the special opening / closing mode If the power is turned off and then it returns, it is possible to execute the effect during opening even if the opening is due to the entry of the game ball to the second auxiliary game start port H10-2. It may be configured.

  Next, in step 3550, the effect display control means SM29 during opening refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special opening / closing mode end command is newly received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 3550, in step 3552, the effect display control means SM29 during opening sets a command for ending the effect in opening under execution (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, to the sub sub control unit SS side) Will be sent). Next, in step 3554, the in-opening effect display control means SM29 turns off the in-opening effect execution permission in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the next process {step 3600 (sixth) Transition to the processing of Also in the case of No in step 3544 or step 3550, the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 3600 (sixth)}.

  In the sixth embodiment, the roulette array pattern displayed in step 3516 and the roulette array pattern displayed in step 3520 are configured to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, for example, when "roulette effect 3" is executed as the effect mode of roulette effect, in other words, when the effect mode is such that the final result of the roulette effect becomes apparent by the roulette array pattern, The roulette array pattern displayed in step 3516 displays an array pattern (for example, roulette array pattern 1 or 2) such that the final result of the roulette effect is not obvious, and the final result of the roulette effect is displayed in step 3520 It can be exemplified that the present invention is configured to replace the roulette arrangement pattern that becomes apparent. Also, in this example, the final result of the roulette effect can be notified when the predetermined period has elapsed after the auxiliary gaming symbol has been stopped, but it is not limited to this and the auxiliary gaming symbol is stopped and displayed. The final result of the roulette effect may be notified prior to the game.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, although roulette effect is performed in conjunction with the auxiliary game symbol variation, this is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the roulette is adjusted according to the main game symbol variation. It is possible to execute the effect, execute the roulette effect at an appropriate timing according to both the main gaming symbol fluctuation and the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation, or execute the roulette effect at an appropriate timing without interlocking with any fluctuation. You may configure (by adjusting the execution time of the roulette effect appropriately, even when the roulette effect is started without interlocking with the symbol variation, a wrinkle is generated between the big hit and the electric chulong open and the result of the roulette effect It is possible not to let).

  Also, in the sixth embodiment, on opening the second main game start opening electric combination B11d in a special opening and closing manner, it is configured to be able to perform effects during opening at the same time as opening is started, There is no limitation to this, for example, in the case of opening the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d in the opening pattern (special opening and closing mode) of 0.5 seconds opening → 0.5 seconds closing → 5.0 seconds opening After the opening for 0.5 seconds is completed (for example, before the opening for 5.0 seconds starts), the effect during opening may be started to be executed.

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the hold information prior determination process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3601, the light emission effect display control unit SM24-2 refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state. If the result of step 3601 is YES, then, at step 3602, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 confirms the value of the auxiliary gaming dress holding counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 3604, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 determines whether the auxiliary gaming costume display suspension counter value has increased based on the check result, in other words, the number of auxiliary gaming side reservations has increased. It is determined whether it has been done. In the case of Yes in step 3604, in step 3610, the light emission effect display control unit SM24-2 determines in advance the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol based on the auxiliary gaming side random number related to the increase of the auxiliary gaming side suspension.

  Next, in step 3612, the light emission effect display control unit SM24-2 refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11b, and the increased suspension enters (or passes) the first auxiliary game start opening H10-2. It is determined whether the hold is caused by the In the case of Yes in step 3612, in step 3614, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "L" based on the result of the prior determination. In the case of Yes in step 3614, in step 3616, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 opens and closes the light emission effect (second main game start opening electric role object B11d based on a predetermined lottery probability (for example, 2/3) An execution lottery for the effect of notifying that there is a possibility that the mode will be a special mode is executed, and the process shifts to step 3620. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 is based on a predetermined lottery probability (for example, 1/30) in step 3618, and the light emission effect (second main game start opening electric part B11d Execute an execution availability lottery of effect to notify that there is a possibility that the opening / closing mode of the will become a special mode, and the process shifts to step 3620.

  Next, in step 3620, the light emission effect display control unit SM24-2 refers to the result of the executability lottery performed in step 3616 or step 3618, and determines whether or not the executability lottery has been won. In the sixth embodiment, when the executability lottery performed in step 3616 is won, the opening / closing mode of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is a special mode triggered by the increased suspension. On the other hand, when winning the executability lottery executed in step 3618, the opening and closing mode of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d does not become a special mode triggered by the increased suspension. It is configured to be scheduled. In the case of Yes in step 3620, in step 3622, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 performs a command to execute an effect (the light emission effect described above) in which the auxiliary game decoration symbol in the auxiliary game decoration symbol display area SG11-H emits light. It is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3700). Also in the case of No in step 3601, step 3604, step 3612 or step 3620, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  In the sixth embodiment, the light emission effect can be executed only in the non-time shortening game state, but the light emission effect may be executed also in the time shortening game state (for example, for example When the "L", which is the auxiliary game symbol to be hit, is to be stopped, the light-emitting effect execution lottery is executed, etc.). Moreover, in 6th Embodiment, although it was comprised so that the production | presentation which the auxiliary | assistant game decoration symbol emits light might be performed as a reservation pre-reading effect, it is not limited to this, For example, the stop symbol of an auxiliary game is a specific lost symbol When the stop display is displayed or the display area of the roulette effect is always displayed and the display area is lighted or the auxiliary game costume display is displayed, the display mode of the auxiliary game layout display change is changed, or (2) A light emitting unit may be provided on the main game start opening motorized role B11 d so that the light emitting unit is turned on.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of secondary game display area size change control processing according to the subroutine of step 3700 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, at step 3702, the effect display size change control means SM28 determines whether the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b is ON, in other words, the roulette effect is being executed (or It is determined whether or not under the condition of waiting for execution). In the case of Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the effect display size change control means SM28 confirms the final result relating to the roulette effect under execution (or under execution standby). Next, in step 3706, the effect display size change control means SM28 determines, based on the confirmation result, whether or not the final result of the roulette effect is "auxiliary game winning". In the case of Yes in step 3706, in step 3708, the effect display size change control means SM28 determines whether roulette effect is being executed (whether or not the execution timing of the roulette effect has been reached). In the case of Yes in step 3708, in step 3710, the effect display size change control means SM28 sets the display size of “display area 2” to “display area 1” in the main game decoration symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. The display size is enlarged and displayed (the display image is illustrated in the margin), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3800). Incidentally, in the case of No at Step 3702, Step 3706 or Step 3708, at Step 3712 the effect display size change control means SM28 sets the “display area 1” in the main game decoration symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. Is displayed larger than the display size of “display area 2” (a display image is illustrated in the margin, but “display area 2” may be deleted), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2700). In the process of step 3706, the determination may be made Yes even when the final result of the roulette effect is "losing" or a part of "main game winning".

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, during the non-time shortening game, the second main game in the auxiliary game related to entering the first auxiliary game start port H10-1. When opening the starting opening electric part B11d in the special opening and closing mode long, it is possible to execute pre-reading effect (in this example, light-emitting effect), fluctuating effect (in this example, roulette effect), and open effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved by providing the player with a sense of expectation regarding the long opening which can store the second main game hold which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, in the auxiliary game related to entering the ball into the second auxiliary game start port H10-2 (in the non-time reduction game state, in the auxiliary game that occurred irregularly to execute the left strike normally, the second main) Even in the case of long opening of the game start opening electric combination B11d in the special opening and closing manner, the above-described effect is not executed. As a result, even if the player plays an unusual game (for example, right-handed) during the non-time shortening gaming state, it is difficult to enjoy the benefit from the long opening of the second main game start port electric role B11 d It is possible to suppress the execution of typical games.

  In this example, during the special game, at the time of fluctuation based on entering the ball to the second auxiliary game start port H10-2, it was configured to be able to perform the effect during fluctuation (roulette effect) and the effect during opening, The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that a pre-hold presentation effect (light emission effect) may be performed, or only an open effect may be performed. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a dedicated effect when the second main game start opening electric winning combination B11d is long-opened in the special opening / closing mode during the special game.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, during the non-time shortening game, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is set to the special opening / closing mode in the auxiliary game related to entering the ball into the first auxiliary game start opening H10-1. When the game ball is made to enter the second main game start opening B10 when the game is released long, the effect during the symbol change related to the game is the non-time shortening gaming state, and the first main game It may be a special aspect that is a presentation aspect that is not executed during symbol variation on the side. In such a configuration, (1) When determining the fluctuation time of the second main gaming side, the selection candidate of the fluctuation time that can be selected does not depend on the number of holdings of the second main gaming side. (2) The effect of the special aspect may be executed in the non-time shortening gaming state. (3) In the non-time shortening gaming state, the pre-reading effect relating to the first main gaming side may be executed, but the second main The prefetching effect relating to the gaming side may not be executed, or the like, and only one configuration of (1) to (3) may be provided, or a plurality of configurations may be simultaneously provided.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the special second large winning opening C20 described above is configured (a game ball with the maximum count number may enter even in a small hit game), and the second main game side is small Winning probability (in this example, normal gaming state, time shortening gaming state, both 160/1024), the winning rate (probability fluctuation) more than 10 times of big hit winning probability (in this example, 3/1024) in normal gaming state The upper limit at which the big hit winning probability can be increased by function is less than 10 times), and by winning a small hit on the second main game side (by entering the V winning opening C22), the winning on a real big hit In the non-time shortening gaming state, when the game is progressing with the left hit, by the constitution to become, in the auxiliary game which relates to the entry to the 1st auxiliary game start mouth H10-1, 2 main game start opening electric role B11d in a special opening and closing mode It will be long open, the game ball will be able to enter the second big winning opening C20 by right-handed, and in the non-time shortening gaming state, it is a real big hit by entering the ball to the first auxiliary game start opening H10-1. It is possible to create a novel game characteristic that the chance of winning the game suddenly comes.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute a parallel lottery in which the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be drawn simultaneously (and variable). If so configured, the second main game side may not have the hold function (the second main game hold upper limit number may be 0). The configuration capable of executing the parallel lottery is described in detail in the seventh embodiment.

  In addition, as a configuration of the sixth embodiment, (1) all of the variation time of the variation where the auxiliary game time short flag is off and the success or failure result of the auxiliary gaming side is lost may be a short time (for example, variation time that can be selected) (2) If the second main game side is elected as a small hit in the non-time shortening gaming state, after the big hit that is triggered by the small hit The average value of time-savings is less than the average value of time-savings after the big hit, which is triggered by the small hit, when the second main game side wins a small hit in the time-saving gaming state, (3) The time reduction gaming state transition rate after the big hit end triggered by the small hit when the second main gaming side wins a small hit in the non-time shortening gaming state, the second main game in the time shortening gaming state When a small hit was won on the side, the big hit triggered by the small hit Ri is lower than the time shortening game state transition rate after completion may be configured as.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the configuration of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is configured such that the ball entry efficiency to the launched game ball is high, such as the second big winning opening C20 of this example. For example, the second main game start opening B10 is disposed to overlap below the first main game start opening A10, and almost all of the game balls fired in both left and right hit are the second main game start It has an induction member which flows down near the mouth B10 and guides the game ball to the second main game start opening B10 in the left and right direction of the second main game start opening B10, of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11 d The game balls guided to the induction member during the opening may be configured to enter almost all the second main game start opening B10.

  Also, in the sixth embodiment, as the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric role B11d, "short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) open → medium time (for example 0.5 seconds) closed → long The time may be open (for example, 4 seconds). The time value is “short time <medium time <long time”. In addition, during the closing period of the middle time, an effect may be performed to urge the game ball (to hit the right in this example) directed to the second main game start port B10.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, a common entry port where the game ball can enter the ball and a entry port where the game ball can enter the ball are provided downstream of the common entry port. First main game start opening, a ball entrance where game balls can enter, an auxiliary game start opening provided downstream of the common entrance, and a game entered into the common entrance It is a member that changes the flow-down direction of the ball toward either one of the first main game start opening and the auxiliary game start opening, and the plurality of game balls entered into the common entrance are the first main game start opening and the first main game start opening The distribution member operates to be alternately distributed to the auxiliary game start opening, and the distribution member is equally distributed to the first main game start opening and the auxiliary game start opening by the weight of the game ball. Or the distributing member is driven electrically and distributed equally to the first main game start port and the auxiliary game start port. It may be configured as not.

Seventh Embodiment
In the embodiment shown so far, one first main game start opening A10 is provided, and the second main game side fluctuation is executed with priority over the first main game fluctuation. In this example, it is possible to create new playability with a configuration different from the configuration. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is taken as a seventh embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the seventh embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it should be added that the seventh embodiment can be applied to any configuration shown in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment executes a parallel lottery in which the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be drawn simultaneously (and can be varied) in parallel. It is configured to earn. In addition, during the special game, the main game symbol which has been changed is configured to be paused. In addition, the first main game start opening is the same position as the present embodiment (left first main game start opening), and it is easy to enter the ball by hitting the right, and it is difficult to enter the ball by hitting the left (or not) It is provided at a position (right first main game start port).

  First, FIG. 86 is a game progress flowchart in the seventh embodiment. The flow of the game shown in the game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Playing progress flow 1>
In the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game start port electric role B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to be in the open state, a so-called non-power support state), the player is the left first main game Aim the starting opening and fire the game ball (make a so-called left strike) to advance the game. Then, if you win the big hit lottery on the 1st main game side (in this example, the big hit probability = 1/256), which is performed triggered by entering the ball into the 1st main game start slot A10, it will be shown in the figure The first main game jackpot is won ", and after the symbol change of the first main game symbol based on the win is finished (after the big hit symbol of the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed), the predetermined maximum number of rounds ( For example, a special game of 10R is executed. In addition, while the special game is being executed, the player is hit to the right to advance the game.

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <game progression flow 1> is over, "time reduction" shown in the figure (second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is a game state that is likely to be in the open state, so-called Since the state shifts to the power support state = time reduction state, the player aims at the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d and shoots the game ball (by performing a so-called right hit) to advance the game, It is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 (at the entrance of the second main game start opening B10 as a trigger, symbol variation of the second main game side and symbol variation of the second main game symbol Is done). Further, in the seventh embodiment, two first main game start ports are provided, and the left first main game start port is easy to enter with a left strike, and the right first main game start port is the right. Since it is easy to hit by hitting, during the special game execution pertaining to the first main game, the game ball enters the right first main game starting opening, so when the special game is over, the first main game hold is The upper limit number (for example, 4) is generated.

<Game progress flow 3>
The "time saving" shown in the figure is configured to continue until the first main game symbol changes 10 times, or the second main game symbol changes 100 times. Here, in the seventh embodiment, the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol are configured to be variable at the same time (so-called parallel lottery is configured to be executable), and in "time saving" The variation of the first main game symbol pertaining to entering the right first main game starting opening and the variation of the second main gaming symbol pertaining to entering the second main game starting opening B10 are executed at the same time It becomes. In addition, in the winning lottery pertaining to the second main game side, winning a small hit in 1/10, and winning the small hit, a big hit due to entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit It is executed, it shifts to the time saving gaming state again, and the number of shorting times will be reset (when the big hit is won, it shifts to the time shortening gaming state again and the number of shorting times will be reset) In the middle ", since the variation of the first main game symbol is also executed, when the first main game symbol has been changed 10 times," time reduction "shown in the figure will end . Therefore, in the "time reduction", it becomes a game characteristic of how many times it is possible to achieve winning in a big hit or a small hit on the second main game side by the end of the first main game pattern fluctuation 10 times ing. Incidentally, in "time saving", the average value of the variation time of the first main game symbol is 5 seconds, and the average value of the variation time of the second main game symbol is 5 seconds. Further, in the seventh embodiment, the average value of gaming balls that can be acquired in "time saving" is the average value of the variation time of the first main game symbol in "time reducing" and the second main game in "time reducing" It is configured to be determined by the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol, the number of time reductions of the first main gaming symbol, and the small hit probability of the second main gaming side. In addition, if the average value of the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol of "time saving", the number of time reductions of the first main game symbol, and the small hit probability of the second main game side become large (high), " The average value of game balls that can be acquired during “short time” becomes large, and the average value of the variation time of the second main game pattern “in time reduction” becomes large, the average value of game balls that can be acquired during “time reduction” is It is configured to be small. In addition, in "time reduction", you may be comprised so that the fluctuation time of a long time (for example, 50 second) may be selected as fluctuation time of a 1st main game symbol. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the special effects such as effects to notify the player of a high profit are executed during the long-term fluctuation. In the "time saving" shown in the figure, when the first main game is finished changing 10 times (when the variation for the number of time saving has ended), transition to the "normal game" shown in the figure It becomes.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to execute parallel lottery and configure the time reduction gaming state to continue until the first main gaming symbol changes a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game characteristic of how many times the second main game side can achieve a big hit or a small hit before the first main game symbol changes a predetermined number of times. It becomes.

  In the seventh embodiment, the variation time of the first main gaming symbol in the time-saving gaming state may be difficult to determine for the player, and in such a configuration, for example, the time may vary depending on the elapsed time. You may execute an effect (it makes it difficult to understand the stop timing of the first main game symbol, etc.) to make it appear that the shortening gaming state is over, or the time shortening gaming state ends when the remaining time disappears An effect may be performed to make it appear, and an effect may be performed such that the remaining time is increased at an arbitrary timing in the time-saving gaming state.

  In the seventh embodiment, the small hit symbol is used as a trigger to shift to the limited frequency state, and when a certain small hit symbol stops, the variation time of the first main game symbol after the stop timing. May be configured to be relatively long.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment always performs right strike (does not switch to left strike) in a high profit state, so the right strike dedicated button on the launch handle D44 (playing the game ball while pressing the button To shoot at all times regardless of the twist of the firing handle D44).

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the time-short limiter (the number of continuous winning upper limit of special games in the time-saving gaming state is provided, and after the execution of the special game reaching the number ends, the non-time-saving gaming state is established. ) Is provided, and when winning a small hit due to a change related to the second main game hold in the non-time shortening gaming state, as a playability such that execution of three or more special games is almost promised at a later timing It is also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the small hit game execution won during the time reduction gaming state, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening C22, the V winning detection effect is not executed, and the said It may be configured to execute an effect (for example, an effect of a disappointing atmosphere) different from the V prize detection effect. In addition, during the small hit game execution which was won during the time reduction gaming state, the first V when the game ball enters in the first opening of the second large winning opening C20 (does not enter the V winning opening C22) It is also possible to execute the winning detection effect, and execute the second V winning detection effect when the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 in the second and subsequent opening of the second large winning opening C20 thereafter. In the first V win detection effect and the second V win detection effect, the second win detection effect is configured to have higher visibility (prominence).

  In the present example (especially in the present embodiment), the first main game side which is won in the non-time-shortened gaming state during a period advantageous to the player (a section in which the payout can be continuously increased) is This is a series of periods after the start of the execution of the special game pertaining to, after the end of the special game to transition to the non-time reduction gaming state, and until there is no second main game hold, In order to output the fact that the game is continuing to the hall computer HC, first, a predetermined external signal (so-called external) from the start timing of the special game pertaining to the first main gaming side won in the non-time shortening gaming state The signal output from one terminal in the terminal board is turned on (and then kept on), and after the end of the special game, it shifts to the non-time shortening gaming state, and the second main game hold no longer exists. timing The predetermined external signal that you configured to OFF is suitable Te.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving gaming state is configured to end at the end of the change when the count value of the time reduction counter MP52c becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If you win a small hit in the fluctuation (variation of the 100th main game symbol since the end of the last special game), the time-saving game state until the end of the small hit game (or the discharge standby time for small hit game elapsed) May be configured not to end. By configuring in such a manner, when the player wins a small hit at the final change time and enters the V winning opening C22 at the time of the subsequent small hit game, time is shortened for the special game generated based on the entering the ball. It can be treated as a special game generated under the gaming state.

  Note that the descriptions of the various features of the invention described in the present invention are not limited to the embodiment or the modification according to the description portion according to the feature, but apply to any of the described embodiments or modifications. There is no problem at all.

  In this example, the opening mode of the second large winning opening C20 is changed to the V winning opening C22 in the small hitting game pertaining to the first main gaming side than in the small hitting game pertaining to the second main gaming side It may be configured to make it difficult to enter the ball. Also, small hit games pertaining to all the first main game small hit symbols may be configured such that entering the V winning opening C22 becomes more difficult than during the small hit game pertaining to the second main game side Even if the small hit game pertaining to a part of the first main game small hit symbol is configured to be more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side Good. In addition, when the small hit game concerning a part of the 1st main game small hit symbols is configured to make entering into the V winning opening C22 more difficult than during the small hit game according to the 2nd main game side, The selection rate of the small hit symbol at the time of the small hit in the first main game side, "The first main game small hit is difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than in the small hit game according to the second main game side Selection rate of symbol> 1st main game small hit symbol (2nd main game small hit symbol except for the first main game small hit symbol where entering into V winning opening C22 is more difficult than during small hit games pertaining to the 2nd main game side Small main hit pertaining to the game side The first main game small hit symbol to be the ease of entering the V winning opening C22 comparable to during the same game during the small winning game), ie, "V difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 1) Main game small hit symbol selection rate> The first main game small hit symbol selection rate may be configured to be easy to enter the V winning opening C22.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the additional configurations shown in the above embodiments are of course added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (superordinate conceptization) of these listed concepts. May be

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (for example, second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
And a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
Second special game control means for executing a second special game which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50) and,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit) according to the determined contents based on the second random number related to the second hold When the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), it is configured that it is substantially deterministic that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variation display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the variable winning opening opening game executed Entry to the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) based on
Under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) continues, the second special game is newly executed during the period when the specific gaming state is maintained. Until the predetermined number is reached, a new second hold can be made until it reaches the predetermined number, while continuous firing of gaming balls directed to a variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) continues Even under circumstances, while the normal gaming state is maintained, a new second hold is configured to be impossible or extremely difficult to occur.
When the second special game is executed, the specified gaming state and the normal game are performed after the execution of the second special game regardless of whether the normal game state or the specified game state is performed before the execution of the second special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be distributed as to which of the states it will be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (for example, second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
And a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
Control is performed so that the first identification information is stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed in the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) according to the determination content based on the first random number First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
Control is performed so that the second identification information is stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination content based on the second random number Second identification information display control means (eg, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
Second special game control means for executing a second special game which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50) and,
When the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variation display. Is configured so as to be substantially deterministic, and variable winning opening opening game is performed under the situation where continuous firing of the gaming ball toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) continues. When executed, entry to the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) based on the executed variable winning opening opening game is configured to be substantially definite,
Assuming that the second identification information change unit is from the start of variation display of the second identification information to the stop display, the normal game state is triggered by the fact that the second identification information change unit is performed once in the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the first identification information change unit is from the start of variation display of the first identification information to the stop display, it is a case where the first identification information change unit is performed once in the specific gaming state. The pachinko game machine is also characterized in that the specific gaming state is maintained thereafter.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (for example, second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
And a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
Second special game control means for executing a second special game which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50) and,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit) according to the determined contents based on the second random number related to the second hold When the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), it is configured that it is substantially deterministic that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variation display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the variable winning opening opening game executed Entry to the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) based on
When the total display period regarding the variable display period of the second identification information during the period when the specific gaming state is maintained is the first total period, and the variation of the second identification information during the period when the specific gaming state is maintained At least the case where the total display period regarding the display period is the second total period longer than the first total period can be taken.
The second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening within the first total period under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) continues The second in the above-mentioned second total period under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) continues rather than the expected number of ball entry to B10) This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the expected number of ball entry into the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) is configured to be larger.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A first variable member which is attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) and which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, The game ball is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10) or compared to the closed or closed state, and when it is shifted to the closed state, the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) The first variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11 d) which is configured to be difficult to enter the game ball compared to the ball entering impossible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (for example, second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
And a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
Second special game control means for executing a second special game which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state related to the opening ease of the first variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), the first variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, second main game start opening electric A game state transition control means (for example, such as that, it has a special game state in which the bonus B11d) is likely to be in the open state, and can be set to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game Specific game control means MP50),
A second variable member (for example, a second-type non-motor-operated part B12) which is displaceable to an open state and a closed state;
A displacement trigger area (for example, the second main game start) that is an area through which the game ball can pass and that causes the second variable member (for example, the second type non-electric accessory B12) to be displaced from the closed state to the open state And have a mouth B10),
While the normal gaming state is maintained, while the gaming ball can not pass or is difficult to pass through the displacement trigger area (for example, the second main game start port B10), the specific gaming state is maintained. The game ball is configured to be passable or easy to pass through in the displacement trigger area (for example, the second main game start opening B10).
The pachinko machine is characterized in that the second random number is acquired when the game ball enters the second variable member (for example, the second kind non-electric role thing B12) in the open state. It is a gaming machine.
In addition, (1) area passage (for example, it is an entrance into a motorized role and does not acquire a second random number) that it becomes a "trigger" to shift from a closed state to an open state. Open the non-electric role A (for example, the one corresponding to the "first variable member" configured as the non-electric role), and when the ball enters the non-electric role A as a trigger, Opening an accessory B (for example, the one corresponding to the above-mentioned "second variable member configured as a non-motorized part") (indirect trigger 1), (2) passing through a region (for example, configured as a motorized part Entry into the equivalent of the above-mentioned “first variable member” (for example, entry into a non-motorized entry into a entry port that does not acquire a second random number) The ball is opened, and when the ball enters the non-electric role A as a trigger, the non-electric role B (eg, non-electric role B) (Indirect trigger 2), (3) passing through the area (for example, entering the motorized part and not acquiring the second random number) A non-motorized part B (for example, the above-mentioned "second part configured as a non-electric part" with the ball into the entrance or the ball into the above "first variable member" configured as a motorized part " It may be any of (variable trigger) opening (a direct trigger).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (5) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize winning entry ball detecting device C22s) in which the game ball entering the variable winning prize port (for example, the second big winning prize port C20) may enter;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game is executed which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, the V prize entrance entering detection device C22s). Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50),
Game information transmission means (for example, game information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub game portion (for example, the sub control board S) to the sub game portion side;
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device) according to the determined content based on the second random number related to the second hold When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), the second identification information is configured to be substantially deterministically stop-displayed in the specific mode after the fluctuation display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the variable winning opening opening game executed Entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detection device C22s) based on
Under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) continues, the second special game is newly executed during the period when the specific gaming state is maintained. Until the predetermined number is reached, a new second hold can be made until it reaches the predetermined number, while continuous firing of gaming balls directed to a variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) continues Even under circumstances, while the normal gaming state is maintained, a new second hold is configured to be impossible or extremely difficult to occur.
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
During the execution of a certain second special game, the first effect to announce whether it will be the specific gaming state or the normal gaming state after the execution of the certain second special game is executed, and thereafter the certain second special game If a second additional special game is executed due to fulfillment of the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the second hold that is remaining during the second execution, the second additional special During the execution of the game, it is possible to execute a second effect for notifying whether the specific gaming state or the normal gaming state will be made after the execution of the second additional special game, and the effect display content of the first effect It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the effect display content of the second effect is configured to be effect display content constituting a series of stories.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize winning entry ball detecting device C22s) in which the game ball entering the variable winning prize port (for example, the second big winning prize port C20) may enter;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
Control is performed so that the first identification information is stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed in the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) according to the determination content based on the first random number First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
Control is performed so that the second identification information is stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination content based on the second random number Second identification information display control means (eg, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game is executed which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, the V prize entrance entering detection device C22s). Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50) and,
One unit from the variable display start of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the first special game and the second special game are not executed in the specific gaming state, and the one unit is determined. When played many times, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state,
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the number of times set as the predetermined number of times can be variably set in the specific gaming state after completion of execution of the first special game and / or the second special game. .

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize winning entry ball detecting device C22s) in which the game ball entering the variable winning prize port (for example, the second big winning prize port C20) may enter;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game is executed which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, the V prize entrance entering detection device C22s). Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50) and,
The second hold can occur until the predetermined number is reached, and continuous shooting of the gaming balls toward the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) continues. When the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric role B11d) is in the open state in the normal gaming state, the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) in the open state A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to adopt a special open state in which a plurality of game balls can enter the ball.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize winning entry ball detecting device C22s) in which the game ball entering the variable winning prize port (for example, the second big winning prize port C20) may enter;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game is executed which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, the V prize entrance entering detection device C22s). Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50) and,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device) according to the determined content based on the second random number related to the second hold When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), the second identification information is configured to be substantially deterministically stop-displayed in the specific mode after the fluctuation display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the variable winning opening opening game executed Entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detection device C22s) based on
The fluctuation display time of the second identification information in the case where the second hold is less than the specified number takes at least one of the first fluctuation display time and the second fluctuation display time longer than the first fluctuation display time. On the other hand, the variable display time of the second identification information in the case where the second hold is the specific number or more is configured to take a variable display time longer than the first variable display time,
The second variation display time or within the second variation display time under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) continues while the specific gaming state is maintained. One or more game balls can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) within the fluctuation display time of the second identification information when the second hold is the specific number or more It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize winning entry ball detecting device C22s) in which the game ball entering the variable winning prize port (for example, the second big winning prize port C20) may enter;
The specific entrance (for example, auxiliary game starting opening H10) where game ball can enter the ball,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
If a variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, V winning entry entering detection device C22s), the right to shift to a second special game which is advantageous for the player Second special game state transition right giving means (for example, special game control means MP30) to be granted;
The second special game that executes the second special game when the game ball enters the specified entrance (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) after the right to shift to the second special game is granted Control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50) and,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device) according to the determined content based on the second random number related to the second hold When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), the second identification information is configured to be substantially deterministically stop-displayed in the specific mode after the fluctuation display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where continuous firing of the game ball directed to the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the variable winning opening opening game executed Entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detection device C22s) based on
When the right to shift to the second special game is granted, the right to shift to the second special game granted until the game ball enters the specified entrance (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) When the second special game is put on standby without exercise, and then the game ball enters the specified entrance (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10), the second special game is granted A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to exercise the right to shift and start the execution of the second special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize winning entry ball detecting device C22s) in which the game ball entering the variable winning prize port (for example, the second big winning prize port C20) may enter;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
Control is performed so that the first identification information is stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed in the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) according to the determination content based on the first random number First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
Control is performed so that the second identification information is stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination content based on the second random number Second identification information display control means (eg, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
A variable winning opening opening game control that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode Means (eg, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game is executed which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area (for example, the V prize entrance entering detection device C22s). Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game ends. MP50),
A game information transmission unit (for example, game information transmission control) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) Means MT),
One unit from the variable display start of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the first special game and the second special game are not executed in the specific gaming state, and the one unit is determined. When played many times, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state,
If the special game state is entered after the end of execution of the first special game and / or the second special game, the number of times set as the predetermined number of times can be made variable.
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
If execution of the variable winning opening opening game is scheduled while the specific gaming state is maintained, it is scheduled after the execution of the second special game based on the scheduled variable winning opening opening game is scheduled The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured to be able to notify the number of times in advance.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of balls entered the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or a predetermined time has elapsed A first special game capable of executing a first special game that executes a unit game a plurality of times to make a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous to the player until Control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, a predetermined number of balls entered the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or a predetermined time has elapsed A second special game that can execute a second special game in which a unit game is made once to make the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous to the player Second special game control means (for example, small hit game control means MP40) for executing
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) which controls to be able to be in the specific game state after the end of the execution of the first special game.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit) according to the determined contents based on the second random number related to the second hold When the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), it is configured that it is substantially deterministic that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the fluctuation display.
When there are a plurality of second reservations and the second special game is executed a plurality of times in response to satisfying the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the plurality of second reservations, When the game balls are fired continuously until the final execution of the second special game after the start of the second special game is started, the first one is more than the total number of the game balls. (Ii) The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the total number of winning balls to be awarded to the player by execution of the special game is increased.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball landing judgment means, MJ11-A first main game start slot entrance ball check means MJ11-B second main game start slot entrance ball check means, MJ11-H auxiliary game on Ball entry judgment means MJ11-C10 1st big winning entry entrance ball deciding means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning entry entrance ball deciding means MJ11-V V prize entry entrance judging means, MJ20 random number acquisition decision executing means MJ21- A 1st main game random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ 21-B 2nd main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-H auxiliary game random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ 30 hold control means MJ 31 hold digestion control means, MJ 31 j fluctuation start condition satisfaction judgment Means MJ32 symbol holding means, MJ32-A first main game symbol holding means MJ32b-A first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-B second Game symbol holding means MJ32b-B second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN game content determination means MN10 hit / off lottery means, MN11- A 1st main game success or failure lottery means MN11ta-A 1st main game success or failure lottery table, MN11-B 2nd main game success or failure lottery means MN11ta-B 2nd main game for success or failure lottery table, MN11-H auxiliary game success or failure lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game use lottery table, MN20 special game transition determination means MN30 variation fixed control means, MN30t variation fixed time timer MN40 symbol content determination means, MN41-A first main game symbol determination means MN41ta-A first main game Lottery table for symbol determination, MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means MN 41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table, MN50 variation mode determination means MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means, MN51 ta -A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-B 2nd main game variation mode determination means, MN 51 ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means, MN 51 ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN60 distribution combination product control unit, MN60b distribution combination product related information temporary storage unit MN60t distribution combination product operation timer, MP game progression unit MP10 display control unit, MP11-C first · · · 2 Main game symbol control means MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol change management timer, MP11 H auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B second main game start opening electric combination opening and closing control means MP21-B second main game start opening electric combination opening and closing condition determination means, MP22t -B 2nd main game start opening electric character opening timer MP30 special game control means, MP31 condition judgment means MP32 special game contents decision means, MP32ta special game contents reference table MP33 special game execution means, MP33-C 1st · 2nd Large winning opening motorized combination opening and closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 special gaming time management means MP34t special gaming timer, MP40 small hitting gaming control means MP41t small hitting gaming timer, MP41t-2 discharge standby timer MP40b small hitting gaming related Temporary information storage means, MP50 Specific game control means MP52 Short end Condition determination means, MP52c time shorting counter MB Game state temporary storage means, MB10-C first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB11b-C first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means, MB10-H auxiliary game State temporary storage means MB11b-H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means, MT information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral equipment, A10 1st main game start opening A11s 1st main game start opening entrance ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21 g 1st main game symbol display part, A21 h 1st main game symbol hold Display part B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start opening B11s 2nd main game start opening entrance ball detection device, B11 d 2nd main game start mouth electric role B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21 g 2nd main game symbol display section B21 h 2nd main game symbol hold display section, C 1st · 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st Large winning opening, C11s first large winning opening winning detection device C11d first large winning opening motorized combination, C20 second large winning opening C21s second large winning opening winning detection device, C21 d second large winning opening electric combination C22 V Prize winning opening, C22 sV prize winning opening entering ball detection device C23 distribution bonus, H auxiliary gaming peripheral equipment H10 auxiliary gaming start opening, H11s auxiliary gaming starting opening entrance detection device H20 auxiliary gaming symbol display device, H21 g auxiliary gaming symbol display portion H21 h Supplementary game symbol hold display unit, S secondary control board SM effect display control means (sub main control board), SM10 display information receiving means SM11b main side information temporary storage means, SM2 Effect display control means SM21 decoration symbol display control means, SM21n drawing display content determination means SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table, SM21b drawing related information temporary storage means SM21t drawing variation time management timer, SM22 drawing reservation information display Control means SM22b Rendering reserve information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect Related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determination means, SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM26 Right-handed indication display control means, SM27 V Winning detection effect display control means SM40 Information transmission and reception Control means, SS effect display means (Savusavu control unit)
SS10 Sub information transmission / reception control means, SS20 Image display control means SS21 b Image display related information temporary storage means, SG Effect display device SG10 Display area, SG11 Decorative symbol display area SG12 First hold display section, SG13 Second hold display section KH Award ball Dispensing control board, KE award ball dispensing device

Claims (1)

The first starting port where game balls can enter
The second starting port where game balls can enter
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening, which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is shifted to the open state, the gaming ball can enter the second starting opening as compared to the ball can enter or close A variable member which is configured so that it is easy and difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting opening as compared to the inability to enter the ball or the open state when displaced to the closed state;
Variable winning opening that can take open and closed states,
A specific area where game balls entered into the variable winning opening may enter;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main game club is
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first starting opening;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs First random number temporary storage means,
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied , the first identification information display unit changes the first identification information according to the content of the determination based on the first random number related to the certain first suspension First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped after being displayed;
First special game control means for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquiring unit, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied , the second identification information display unit changes the second identification information according to the content of the determination based on the second random number related to the certain second hold Second identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after being displayed;
Variable winning opening opening game control means for executing a variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening can be opened from the closed state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode,
Second special game control means for executing a second special game which is advantageous for the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entry into the specific area;
The game state related to the ease of opening the variable member includes the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be open than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the first special game or the second special game Game state transition control means for controlling to be in the specific game state in
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the secondary gaming unit side,
One unit from the variable display start of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the first special game and the second special game are not executed in the specific gaming state, and the one unit is determined. When played many times, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state,
If the special game state is entered after the end of execution of the first special game and / or the second special game, the number of times set as the predetermined number of times can be made variable.
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
If execution of the variable winning opening opening game is scheduled while the specific gaming state is maintained, it is scheduled after the execution of the second special game based on the scheduled variable winning opening opening game is scheduled Configured to be able to notify the number of times in advance ;
Under the condition that the variable winning opening opening game is scheduled to be executed when the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied The pachinko gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein it is possible to notify in advance that the variable winning opening opening game is scheduled to be executed by the second hold .

Images